JP6529049B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a demonstration as being in a standby state when it is in a customer wait state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-213564 A (paragraphs [0065] to [0067])

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a concern that the amusement interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the gaming motivation of Yu technique's.

  The effective solution for achieving the above-mentioned objective is shown below. The operation and the like will be described as necessary. In addition, although corresponding configurations and the like are appropriately shown in the embodiments of the invention for ease of understanding, the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
It is a gaming machine that performs variable display,
Operation means operable by the player to fire the game ball;
Display means capable of displaying an effect;
Effect executing means for executing the effect;
Movable means movable between the standby position and the emergence position;
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable means can be moved to the appearance position, and the display means can be made to perform standby effect according to the movement of the movable means to the appearance position And
When the player touches the operation means with a palm or finger to start playing a game in a situation where the standby effect is being executed, the movable means appears at a position where the variable display is not performed. It is possible to move from the standby position to the standby position and switch to an effect display different from the standby effect displayed on the display means, and while the player is touching the operation means with a palm or a finger, A game machine characterized by continuing to execute an effect display different from the standby effect without executing the standby effect, in a state where the variable display is not performed .

  This gaming machine is provided with a hit ball launcher, a game control means, an effect control means, and a detection means. The hit ball launcher is capable of causing the electric drive source to launch the game ball toward the game area defined on the game board with a launch strength corresponding to the amount of operation when the launch handle is operated. The game control means can control the progress of the game based on a detection signal from the start area ball detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the start area provided in the game board. The effect control means can control the progress of the effect by the image display device based on the control command from the game control means. The detection means is capable of detecting whether or not the firing handle is operated.

  The effect control means includes at least a game start effect progress control means and a game effect progress control means. The game start effect progression control means can advance the game start effect by the image display device when it is determined that the game is started by operating the launch handle based on the detection signal from the detection means. . The game effect progression control means generates a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player from the game start effect which the game start effect progression control means advances in the image display device based on the detection signal from the start area entering detection means The game effect can be advanced by switching to a game effect for deriving and displaying a win determination result that tells whether or not to be played.

  The game effect switched from the game start effect is developed as an effect having a story that is continuous with the game start effect.

  As described above, when it is determined that the launch handle is operated based on the detection signal from the detection means, the display of the game start effect by the image display device is started. As a result, the player is seated at the seat of the gaming machine and operates the firing handle to cause the game ball to be fired by the electric drive source toward the gaming area defined in the gaming board, although the game is started. Even if the game ball does not enter the starting area provided on the game board, the game display effect by the image display device automatically advances when the player operates the launch handle to start the game. Since it is supposed to be played, it is possible to avoid a state in which the effect does not advance at all when the gaming ball does not enter the starting area at the start of the game. Then, when the player operates the firing handle to cause the game ball to be fired by the electric drive source and enter the start area, the jackpot game state becomes advantageous to the player from the game start effect advancing in the image display device. Is switched to a game effect for deriving and displaying a win determination result that tells whether or not a. The game effect switched from the game start effect is developed as an effect having a story having a game start effect and a continuous game, and when switching from the game start effect to the game effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable. The continuation of the game start effect is continuously developed as a game effect by switching of the effect. For this reason, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a sense of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur in the result of the win determination due to the switching of the effect. In this manner, the derivation display of the determination result of success determination is started, which tells whether or not a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated after the player starts operating the game by starting the game by operating the firing handle. It is possible to contribute to improving the player's willingness to play in stages in each of the effects up to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game from the start of the game to the progress of the game effect.

  In this embodiment, for example, the rotary handle main body 506 of the handle device 500 of FIG. 5 corresponds to the firing handle, the game board 4 of FIG. 8 corresponds to the game board, and the game area 1100 of FIG. 4 corresponds to the game area. 12 correspond to the electric drive source, the ball striking launcher 650 of FIG. 5 corresponds to the striking ball launcher, and the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 in FIG. 8 correspond to the start area. The upper start opening switch 3022 and the lower start opening switch 2109 in FIG. 11 correspond to the start area entering detection means, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 11 corresponds to the game control means, and various commands shown in FIGS. Corresponds to the control command, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 8 corresponds to the image display device, the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. 11 corresponds to the effect control means, and the handle device 50 of FIG. The touch switch 516 provided in corresponds to the detecting means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the gaming machine, and the effect at the game start in FIGS. 63 (a)-(d) corresponds to the game start effect, FIG. (C), (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIGS. 65 (a), 65 (b) corresponds to the game effect, and step S1009 in the processing when the peripheral control unit of FIG. 57 is turned on. The peripheral control unit steady process of step S1038 corresponds to the game start effect progression control means and the game effect progression control means.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease of the gaming motivation of Yu technique's.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 8, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to a pachinko game machine It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 17; FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a rotation range of a rotation angle in front of the rotation handle main body, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a relationship between a rotation angle of a detection shaft of a potentiometer and a rotation angle in front of the rotation handle body. It is a figure (a) which shows an example of the output characteristic of a potentiometer, and a figure (b) which shows the table which shows the setting electric current to a radiation | emission solenoid. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which drives a firing solenoid and a ball sending solenoid, respectively. It is a circuit diagram showing a uselessness prevention circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 27. FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 28. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows continuation of the various commands transmitted to the periphery control board from the main control board of FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power-on of FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on, following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball look determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a rental ball. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout ball look-up operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball ball operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of retry operation monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inconsistency counter reset judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and input signal confirmation processing (A) from CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation at the time of the portable terminal set displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect at the time of the game start displayed on the display area of a game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which each shows an example of the starting winning acupuncture effect and the first start winning a prize-limited rendering displayed on the display area of a game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display effect displayed on the display area of a game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the alert of absence notification displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the error alerting | reporting displayed on the display area of a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the setting of the break time displayed on the display area of a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the call of the attendant displayed on the display area of a portable terminal.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of the game hall and a box pivotally supported openably and closably on the outer frame 2. A game board 4 having a game area 1100 having a frame-shaped main frame 3 and a main game frame 3 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front and into which a game ball as a game medium is hit, and the front of the main frame 3 and the game board 4 on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the main body frame 3. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed under the gaming window 101 A tray-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4; And. In addition, the distance dimension of the vertical direction of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko game machine 1, and is comprised large.

  In front view, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction, respectively, and the horizontal widths of the respective frames are substantially the same. The dimension of the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the size of the outer frame 2. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the game area 1100 in which the game balls are hit through the substantially circular game window 101 is exposed, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101 As such, two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are disposed up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play a game. It is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the area 1100, the various winning openings, the special effects, and the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. The outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 4, upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 extending in the lateral direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions, and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 with each other by the connecting members 14 to form a vertically long rectangular ( Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. In addition, an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, for example, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in pachinko island facilities of the game hall, etc. The finger of the person makes it easy to hold the pachinko gaming machine 1, and at the same time, the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is disposed so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed to a lower inner predetermined position of the left side frame plate 12 A support fitting 21 and a reinforcement fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front face of the reinforcement fitting 22 It has 23 and. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. A main frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support bracket 21, and the support support 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 is After inserting the main frame 3 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 can be easily locked by locking the support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be pivoted open and close freely.

  Further, in the outer frame 2, two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed to the inner side of the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

[3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided openably and closably on the front side of the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a main frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4 An upper shaft support fitting 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 mounted on the upper end and the lower end of the left side end of the main body frame base 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and rotatably supporting the door frame 5; A ball hitting device 650 attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600 for hitting a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and a back of the main frame base 600 attached to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 When the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3 from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling electrical parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right end of the main frame base in a front view, opening and closing locking of the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2, and locking and closing the door frame 5 to the main frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and is formed so as to have a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. It is done. The main unit frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part; A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the base 600 and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 rearwardly from the lower end of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which the open side outward bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 which protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and which forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves of the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and the upper end regulating rib 609 hanging down from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and having a plurality of lower ends arranged in the left and right direction. And have. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the back direction There is. In addition, the game board locking portion can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Further, the main frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the ball hitting and launching device is on the front right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A striking launcher 650 is mounted from the front side so that 650 small launch solenoids 654 are housed within the solenoid receiving recess. With the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the front of the lower rear wall 604, a far space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the firing rail 660 in the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in a front view. It is supposed to be. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entrance 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 is located below the far space 626. The gaming ball having descended the far space 626 is received by the far ball inlet 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the dish unit 300.

  Also, the main frame base 600 has a plurality of openings formed in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower rear wall 604 in the front-rear direction and a plurality of openings on the upper side and front-rear left and right sides And a through hole 615 penetrating through the The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of 800 are arranged to face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view When the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is supposed to be. Further, a main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the rear side lower than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 will be described. The upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left end upper and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw, so that the door frame 5 is fixed to the main body frame 3 The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of opening and closing.

  The upper shaft support fitting 630 is a plate-like attachment portion 631 attached to the upper side bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631 7, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from near the front end of the front extension 632 and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. (See above) is inserted downward in the vertical direction through which the door frame shaft support hole 634 is inserted and the pivoting end to the open side of the door frame 5 hanging down from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in front view And a stopper. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed on the lower side of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion and a plate-shaped mounting portion extending in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plate-like front extension part 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c which penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension part 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted A stopper 642 d is provided to stand upward from a left end in a front view of the extension portion 642 b and to restrict the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. In the door frame shaft support fitting 642, the mounting portion, the front extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  Further, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion and a plate-like mounting portion extending in the vertical and horizontal directions. A forwardly extending portion 644b is provided, and a body frame shaft support hole vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the forwardly extending portion 644b. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction. The front extension portion 642 b and the front extension portion 644 b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  When the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxial. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is engaged with the support projection 21d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 4). The front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close. It is supposed to be.

  Also, with the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 attached to the body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630 and the door frame support hole of the lower shaft support 640 The door frame is configured such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 with the position 642 c coaxially positioned. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 (see FIG. 7) on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is mounted on the door frame of the upper shaft support fitting 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by inserting the shaft support hole 634 into the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By sliding the shaft pin 155 upward after the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap vertically. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 will be described. The ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is mounted on a lower base of a lower rear wall 604 of the main frame base 600 at a predetermined position on a front surface of a metal plate, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protrudes forward on the lower rear surface of the firing base 652. , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement trajectory of the tip 658 Between the firing rail 660 attached to the front end of the firing rail 660 and the firing rail 660 attached to the front end of the firing rail 660, and the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 At the same time the game ball is made passable, the game ball can form a gap through which the game ball can not pass and the game ball is held at the base end of the firing rail 660 It is restricted that the hitting ball 656 (bending tip 658) turns to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position which can hit the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the locking piece 662 and the ball locking piece 662 And a stopper 664. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is large. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the gaming hall, the vertical dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is designated in advance. Therefore, by configuring the game board 4 to be large in size, the vertical distance dimension of the ball striking device 650 is reduced under the restriction of the longitudinal dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ball striking device 650 is miniaturized. Along with this, a small launch solenoid 654 is employed.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted for the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting and launching apparatus 650, the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates by the strength (speed) according to the rotational operation angle (rotational operation amount) of the handle device 500. It is supposed to The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end is at the axial center of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b to which the tip 658 is fixed at the tip with the normal direction directed, and a stopper portion 656c which can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side across the fixing portion 656a with respect to the collar portion 656b; Is equipped. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In a state where the striking device firing device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially at the center in the lateral direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, ie 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601) is positioned lower than the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction A far space 626 is formed to extend downward. And, the ball hitting device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in a front view. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the far space 626, is received by the far ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the winning ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the gaming balls supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the pachinko island facility are stored, and then the upper tray 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is something to pay out. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the top of the back surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged in the game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent downstream, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to pay out based on the payout instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. The game machine is mainly equipped with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784.
[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722 of the award ball tank 720, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. One end side of the ball straightening member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and a weight is held therein, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the award ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 includes an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at an upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and a tank continuous with the right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view A ball pressure plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the rail 731 and a ball stopper 735 capable of advancing and retracting into the tank rail 731 and stopping rolling of the gaming ball in the tank rail 731 to the discharge port side And. Two alignment gears 732 are provided in line in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for delivering the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 is open at the upper end and has a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction, and communicates with the lower end of the supply passage and has a predetermined size. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage communicating with the lower end of the distribution space on the rear side (open side) in the rear view and bent in a substantially U shape and opened on the left side in the rear view, a rear view right side of the distribution space And a ball removal passage communicating with the lower end and extending downward and opening at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is engaged with the first gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear to be rotated, the dispensing rotating body integrally rotated with the third gear and disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotating body are integrally rotatably fixed on the opposite side across the third gear, circumferentially A ball breakage switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage, provided with a rotation detection board on which a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals. Holds a count switch 751 for detecting gaming balls flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed on a rotation detection board integrally rotating with the payout rotary body, and a rotation angle switch 752 Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotary body is provided with three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one gaming ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the gaming sphere supplied from the supply passage is 1 by rotation of the payout rotary body. Each ball is accommodated in the recess so that it can be dispensed to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. In addition, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotation body are equally divided (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotation body. The rotational position of the payout rotary body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotational angle switch 752 provided at each position. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 744.

  In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotor is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage are dispensed to the prize ball passage, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the winning ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and delivered to the winning ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member is operated by a store clerk or the like in the hall, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball pulling passage, and the game balls paid out to the ball pulling passage are The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full Tank Branch Unit]
The full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper rear end. A game is performed from the bottom of the prize ball receptacle in the branch space to the front side from the prize ball receptacle which receives the game ball which has flowed down the ball passage, the branch space which is disposed below the prize ball receptacle and extends laterally. The normal passage for guiding the ball, the gaming ball distributed in the normal passage are released forward, and the normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view front view And a full ball outlet 776 that is released forward from the full ball passage 774 and is open on the left side of the ball view 774 in a front view. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball outlet port for receiving gaming balls that have been opened upward at the left end in a front view at the rear end upper portion and flowed down the ball outlet passage of the prize ball device 740; A ball extraction passage for guiding the game ball received in the mouth to the front, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage to the front, and at a position rearward of the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the left end in front view And an open ball outlet.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is normally in communication with the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1), passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540. The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 of the unit 300 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed to communicate with the upper end of the main frame base ball removal passage in the main body frame base 600 in the right side in a rear view, and the game ball released from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the body frame base 600 It is delivered to the base ball removal passage.

  When the gaming ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) with the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 being full of gaming balls, the ball is raised from the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540. The game balls which can not be ejected to the side of the tray 301 stay in the first ball passage of the far cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream of the full ball branch unit 770 is filled up. In this state, the gaming ball that has entered the branch space from the winning ball receptacle can not normally enter the passage, and starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the gaming ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters into the tan passage and is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300 from the full ball outlet through the second ball inlet 542c of the far cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 has a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in a front view, A power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810 and a power supply substrate box attached to the rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a dispensing control substrate box 860 attached to the back surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal substrate box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the dispensing control substrate box 860 in front view And the substrate unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is a discharge ball receiving portion 841 receiving the gaming balls discharged upward and discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 at the front left on the left and right center in front view; It is opened forward and upward at the front of the discharge passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging it, the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) And a box accommodating portion formed such that the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed, flows through the opening of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the body frame base ball removal passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the body frame base 600. The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 can be discharged through the discharge passage 842 to the lower back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It has become.

  The power supply substrate box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components and the like through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the A power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  The delivery control board box 860 includes a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open to the rear, a thin box-like cover 862 that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and is open to the front, and a box base 861 And a payout control substrate 4110 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In the present embodiment, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In addition, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 when the power is turned on and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100, or after the power is turned on. When notified of an error, it is operated to clear the error, and the function to clear the RAM when the power is turned on and the time after the power is turned on (a period of playing the function as the RAM clear has passed And the function of canceling the error in A detailed description of this point will be given later.

  Terminal board box 870 has a board base 871 attached to the rear face of speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of board base 871 and peripheral panel relay terminals 872 fixed backward, and a board base A game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the 871 and having the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the back side And a substrate cover 874 covering the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and CR unit relaying The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are provided for the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 for the board unit 800, etc. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decoration board, the operation unit 400 and the like. By attaching the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the board attachment portion formed on the front face of the board unit base 810, the front face of the main body frame base 600 is faced frontward, A wire extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 and the relay terminal board cover 692 Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal board 880 is a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, a touch of the ball lending unit 360 in the bowl unit 300 disposed on the door frame 5 side. The relay 516 relays the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the body frame 3 side. In addition, regarding the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360, the return button 362, the loan remaining display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the release stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the far cover unit 540. The explanation will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in the decoration units 200, 240, 280 and the decoration unit 200 provided on the door frame 5 side, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is there. Note that each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, dial operation Description of various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 has a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer periphery is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertical circular shape (elliptical shape), A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the frame base unit 100 and a left side attached to the left outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200 A decoration unit 240, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And 100. A pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front of the 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. To the rear of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540 and to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101. And a glass unit 590.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a game window 101 which is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is vertically long and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is substantially oval in vertical length; An upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the game window 101 at the front of the base body 110 for fixing the upper decoration unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base 110 A speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 for supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A crime prevention cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIG. 1 and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and attached to the rear face of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101 Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided on the potentiometer 512 of the handle unit 500 described later and the game board 4 described later A handle relay terminal board 192 (see FIG. 1) relaying connection with 100, a handle relay terminal board cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal board 192, and a center in the horizontal direction A frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 which is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191, handle relay terminal plate 192, etc. on the opposite side (right side (axial support side) from the center in the horizontal direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body (See FIG. 1) and a frame ornamental drive amplifier substrate cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame ornamental drive amplifier substrate 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140 provided on the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is provided with an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, each decoration board provided in each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, dish unit 300 and operation unit 400, and a dial drive motor provided in operation unit 400. Wires for electrically connecting the switches, the handle relay terminal board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc. with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being collected and bundled at the position of the right side (axial support side), it is extended backward and connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base main body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101 having a vertically elongated inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape is entirely upwardly offset. It is done. The game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. In addition, at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch capable of inserting the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Speaker attachment portion for attaching and fixing the side speaker 130, which is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101, and the right (open side) end of the front which is disposed in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. The handle attachment portion for attaching the handle bracket at a slanted angle so as to retract, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion, the upper side of the handle attachment portion The lock hole 116 is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short in the forward direction and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 150 is provided with an upper reinforcement sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the upper side back surface of the door frame base main body 110 and a pivot support attached along the back side of the pivoting side of the door frame base main body 110. A side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the side of the door frame base main body 110, and a game window 101 of the door frame base main body 110. And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the lower surface of the lower side, and they are formed into a square shape by mutually fastening them with a screw or a rivet.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface. It is equipped integrally. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that abuts on the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided at the rear lower portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 attached along the opening side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are inserted by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating in one direction (rotating in the opposite direction to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2). The door frame 5 can be released with respect to the main body frame 3 by disengaging from the hook 165.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The dish unit 300 is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740, and the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 are hit and fired via the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The upper tray upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left to the center in a front view, and from the center to the front in a straight line toward the right. It is formed to protrude. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the pan unit 300, and a rectangular shape larger than the outline of the portable terminal 470 for mounting the portable terminal 470 on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. The recess 314 d is formed. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which the concave portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when the player presses the portion downward by hand, the portion is bent downward, When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the portable terminal 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the portable terminal 470, the upper tray upper panel 314 receives the force by the upper tray upper panel 314. This prevents the portable terminal 470 from being damaged. That is, the upper dish upper panel 314 is broken first before the portable terminal 470 is broken. When the upper tray upper panel 314 is broken, the tray unit 300 is replaced.

  The tray unit 300 also has an upper tray ball withdrawal mechanism 340 for withdrawing the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball withdrawal button 341, and the lower plate ball withdrawal button 354. The lower ball ball extraction mechanism 350 for extracting the gaming ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b in accordance with the operation of the above, and not shown installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 And a ball unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. The player can receive the operation of the player or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the game state, and participates not only in the game ball hitting operation for the player but also the effect during the game To be able to The rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for reverse rotation.

4-2-2. Ball unit]
The rental ball unit 360 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a loan remaining display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. When the rental ball button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365 c can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be viewed through the loan remaining display portion 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls are put on the bowl unit by inserting a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. While being able to lend (pay out) in the upper plate 301 of 300, when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount will be returned ing. Further, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

4-2-3. Mobile terminal]
The portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is managed by a hole. A unique number (ID number) is pre-recorded on each of the mobile terminals managed by the hall. In the portable terminal 470 in the present embodiment, No. 1 as an ID number. 123 is stored in advance. The player goes to the reception of the hall, receives the portable terminal 470, sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, and places the portable terminal 470 in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the tray unit 300. When the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314 d, the peripheral control board 4140 performs communication initialization for bidirectionally exchanging information (various data) with the portable terminal 470 in a bi-directional manner. In this communication initialization, individual information acquisition processing for acquiring an ID number from the portable terminal 470 is performed, and the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition processing, and the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (machine number installed in the hall, In the present embodiment, association processing is performed to associate No. 8) with each other. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal 470 have a one-to-one correspondence, and except for the clerk portable terminal MST possessed by a clerk such as a clerk in a hall traveling around the hall, the other portable terminals 470 ' Even if information is received from another portable terminal 470 'even if it is placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is determined not to be information from the portable terminal 470 and the portable terminal While rejecting the information from 470 ′, it is determined that the portable terminal 470 is not the information from the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the information from the other pachinko gaming machine 1 ′ adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is input by wireless. It is configured to reject information from the pachinko gaming machine 1 '. That is, in the communication initialization, in a state where the portable terminal 470 associated in the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the gaming board It is possible to maintain a state in which operations of various gaming devices provided in 4 can be started. On the other hand, in communication initialization, another portable terminal 470 ′ different from the portable terminal 470 associated in the association processing is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 In the (set) state, it is possible to maintain a state in which operations of various game devices provided on the game board 4 can not be started. In other words, the portable terminal is the key (key) for starting the operation of the gaming device.

  In this manner, the player goes to the reception of the hall and receives the portable terminal 470, and places (sets) the portable terminal 470 carried by the player in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300. Thus, the unique number (ID number) stored in advance in the portable terminal 470 is associated with the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the base number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). Therefore, if the player may leave the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to, for example, a rest break, he or she may leave the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by holding the portable terminal 470. Player goes to the reception of the hall and receives the portable terminal 470 ', and the portable terminal 470' carried by the player sits on the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine Even if the portable terminal 470 'is set (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the operation of the gaming apparatus can not be started. The game can not be resumed by maintaining the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resumption of the game by another player while away from the seat.

  The portable terminal 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) communicate when the portable terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 has not been able to communicate with the portable terminal 470, that is, since the player takes out the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314d (lifts). It is designed to start counting elapsed time. When the portable terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not seated in the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is not ready to start the game. It is configured to display in a display area of a liquid crystal display device (also referred to as a "game board side liquid crystal display device") provided on the game board 4 with a screen of a seat release notification for notifying that it is away.

  When the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to, for example, a rest break or purchase of a drink, the pachinko gaming machine by leaving the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the portable terminal 470. A state where 1 is displayed by displaying a screen for notifying of absence on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device is maintained. At this time, when the clerk portable terminal MST owned by a clerk of a hall who patrols the hall is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is Communication initialization is performed to exchange information (various data) in a wireless manner with the attendant mobile terminal MST bi-directionally. The display area of the clerk mobile terminal MST for the elapsed time when the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 can not communicate, that is, the elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314 d It is supposed to be displayed on. When the elapsed time displayed on the screen has passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in this embodiment), a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall holds the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who left the seat and In order to cancel the correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine 1, by touching the release button displayed on the screen, a correspondence cancellation command is transmitted from the clerk mobile terminal MST to the peripheral control board 4140. (In addition, the clerks of the hall who patrols the hall should contact the manager of the hall management room or the person in charge of the counter at the hall reception desk before releasing the correspondence between the portable terminal 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 , The player carrying the portable terminal 470 sends a call announcement to the effect that the player will return to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A clerk, such as a clerk of the hall, is on the upper tray of the tray unit 300. The attendant mobile terminal MST is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the panel 314, and the hole is circulated until the call announcement flows and a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses. A clerk in the hall places the clerk mobile terminal MST on the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 again, and the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 communicate with each other. When the elapsed time after which the player can not perform, that is, the elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314 d, is displayed in the display area of the attendant mobile terminal MST, the clerk of the hall clerk or the like Since the elapsed time displayed on the screen has already passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in the present embodiment), the portable phone carried by the player who left the seat And thus to release the correspondence between the end 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1). The peripheral control board 4140 cancels the correspondence between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat in accordance with the received correspondence cancellation command, and waits for a customer from the notice of absence notice. It will switch to the demonstration that will be the screen. When a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall takes out the clerk mobile terminal MST from the recess 314 d (when lifting it), it can receive a portable terminal 470 ′ owned by another player. In other words, another player can sit on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and place the portable terminal 470 'in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start playing the game. There is. In addition, when a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall takes out the clerk mobile terminal MST from the recess 314 d (when it is lifted), the screen for notifying of absence is switched to a demonstration for becoming a screen waiting for customers, but this demonstration In the case where the portable terminal is placed (set) in the recess 314 d and the game is not started while the game is being performed, a transition to the power saving mode is made after the demonstration.

  Also, the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time, for example, the player who left the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the portable terminal 470 due to a rest break, purchase of drinks, etc. When leaving the seat, when the portable terminal 470 is removed from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 (when it is lifted), the remaining time until the game restart time is counted in the portable terminal 470 (that is, The portable terminal 470 also has a clocking function.) In the display area, the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in the present embodiment), Please return within 15 minutes and set again. ”And are displayed respectively. When this message is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is displayed by being switched to a message notifying the remaining time until the game resumption time. When the remaining 3 minutes are reached, the display area of the portable terminal 470 displays the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the message "3 minutes remaining until the game restart time", and the remaining time 3 The minute number "3" blinks, and the background color changes from white to deep red. At this time, the portable terminal 470 continues to vibrate as being bully, and a warning sound of "boo, boo, boo" continues to be emitted. In this state, when the portable terminal 470 is placed again in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the communication between the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored. Vibration and alarm sound are to be stopped. On the other hand, when the portable terminal 470 is not placed again in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 by the game resumption time, the portable terminal 470 is the platform of the pachinko gaming machine 1 While canceling the correspondence with the number, a message to that effect is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. Thus, the portable terminal 470 also has a support function for returning to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the player is playing a game.

  In addition, when the portable terminal 470 is held away from the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to, for example, a rest break or purchase of a drink, the remaining time until the game resumption time is counted in the portable terminal 470 and the display area Is the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) and the message "Please return within 15 minutes and set again." The player who has left the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may accidentally forget the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that he was playing a game of the portable terminal 470 It is good if the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the display area (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) is confirmed (if you look at it), pachinko gaming And it is capable of preventing the setting the portable terminal 470 seated by mistake in front of one and other different pachinko machines. Therefore, even if you are away from your seat, you can return to the original seat and resume playing the game. When the player sets the portable terminal 470 to another pachinko gaming machine different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which he or she is playing a game, the display number of the pachinko gaming machine is different in the display area of the portable terminal 470 A message telling you that you are

  By the way, since the portable terminal 470 is owned by the hall, when the player brings the portable terminal 470 out of the hall, the notification sound is detected by the detection device installed at the hall entrance and exit, It sounds like the reception of the hall and the hall control room. However, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as when taking a meal break or taking a break to refresh, the rest time is set, and as described later, the display area of the portable terminal 470 If the remaining time until the game resumption time is displayed, a notification sound will be sent to the hall entrance, the hall reception, and the hall management room even if the portable terminal 470 is detected by the detection device installed at the hall entrance. It is designed not to ring. Also, even if the player can temporarily take out the portable terminal 470 out of the hall, it is possible to grasp the current position of the portable terminal 470 by the tracking system on the hall side.

  In addition, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal 470 bi-directionally wirelessly exchange various information (various data) during the game, the power of the portable terminal 470 is consumed. A portable terminal charging device 460 for wirelessly charging the portable terminal 470 is attached to the back side of the upper dish upper panel 314 corresponding to the bottom surface of the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314. The charging method by the portable terminal charging device 460 will be briefly described. The transmitting terminal coil is provided in the portable terminal charging device 460 and the receiving side coil is provided in the portable terminal 470. The current is changed to change the magnetic flux, and the change of the magnetic flux from the transmission side coil causes the current to flow to the reception side coil, thereby transmitting the power by "electromagnetic induction". In this manner, when the player places the portable terminal 470 received at the reception of the hole in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the player charges the portable terminal 470. Since charging is automatically started without performing the work of connecting the wiring, it is possible to prevent communication between the portable terminal 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the power consumption of the portable terminal 470. Is not interrupted. Thereby, the player can play the game for a long time without worrying about the battery remaining amount due to the power consumption of the portable terminal 470.

[4-3. Ball sending unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 one ball at a time, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be It can be withdrawn to the lower tray 302 by the operation of the upper disc ball release button 341 of the removal mechanism 340.

  In the ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharging port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction , And a box-shaped front cover having a ball outlet open to the lower side of the entry opening, and a rear open box-like front cover, and a box-like form closing the rear end of the front cover and having the front open open Back cover having a hitting supply port 582a for supplying the game ball intruded from the entrance of the front cover to the hit ball launcher 650, and pivoting about an axis extending in the longitudinal direction between the back cover and the front cover A ball removing member having a partitioning portion that is pivotally supported so as to partition between the entry port and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member one ball at a time Supply port 582a up and down between front cover and rear cover And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member accepts one game ball while the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member receives The game balls are to be sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 and has a cylindrical handle shape with a front end bulging in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base rotatable relative to the handle base. It is disposed on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, which is fixed on the front of the rotary handle main body, and on the front of the rotary handle main body 506. And a front end cover 508 which is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the rotary handle front 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the rotation center in front of the rotary handle main body, and has a noncircular bearing portion at the rear end and the bearing portion of the shaft member The potentiometer 512 fixed to the front of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 between the handle base and the potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft portion which is made rotatable and fixed to the front of the handle base so as to detect the potentiometer 512 A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at different positions on the rear surface of the switch support member , A single-shot bolt rotatably supported on the switch support member and operating the firing stop switch 518 And a handle disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urging the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body back to the original rotational position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) A return spring, and a gear mechanism 519 that expands the rotation of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to a detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 by a predetermined factor (in the present embodiment, it enlarges by a factor of 1.5). The potentiometer 512 is used to electrically adjust the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front handle 506. In addition, the rotation handle body front 506 and the rotation handle body are rotated from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in front view. Do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotary handle main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes in accordance with the rotational position (rotational angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle after the main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotational position after the rotary handle main body 506 and the rotary handle main body There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls are paid out from the winning ball unit 700, and the game is played regardless of being fired by the ball striking device 650. The game balls (fowl balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base which is open on the front side and has a flow passage of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover which closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the false cover unit 540 is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and extends through the first ball inlet 542a penetrating in the front-rear direction and the first ball inlet and extends to the front right of the cover base 542 A single ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c disposed on the outer side (right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a, and a second ball passage in communication with the cover base And a second ball inlet 542 c inclined so as to extend downward and lower toward the lower right corner in the front view. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage of the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the predetermined amount of gaming ball is A storage space that can be stored is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is disposed at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and opens in the upper direction to the far ball inlet 542e, and the far ball inlet 542e communicates with the ball ball in the vicinity of the second ball passage downstream. And a ball passage. In addition, the cover base is provided with an opening and closing operation piece for operating the opening and closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening and closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening and closing crank in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to rotate the opening and closing crank to open the opening It can be in the open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed at the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front and back direction An outlet and a second ball outlet disposed at the lower right corner in a front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper countersink supply port of the tray unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. In addition, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower bowl ball supply rod in the bowl unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 receives the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a and passes through the first ball passage to the first ball outlet 300 It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet, through the second ball passage from the second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 via the lower tray and the lower tray inlet of the tray unit 300.

  Further, when the door cover 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the far ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3, so that the ball hitting and launching apparatus can be used. When the game ball fired by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the gaming ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the fowl cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in a front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be pivotable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 for detecting swinging of the swinging member, and a spring for biasing the swinging member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550 are provided. The lower end of the swinging member is pivotally supported by the cover base so that the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and the left side wall of the accommodation space is substantially vertical. It is supposed to form. Further, the swinging member is biased to a substantially vertical position by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the storage space is full with the stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 and FIG. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 disassembled and viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, as described above, the size of the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 can be made compact by adopting the small-sized firing solenoid 654, and a large size game can be made by enlarging the vertical dimension of the game board 4. It has become board 4. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the large-sized game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112 and a game area in which a game ball as a game medium is hit by the player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that partitions the outer periphery of the 1100 and the player can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component 1110 in front view Function display unit 1180 disposed at the predetermined position, and a plurality of openings attached in the back of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front and back direction with a predetermined shape at the position corresponding to the game area 1100 A plate-shaped game panel 1150 having 1158, a table unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150, and a game Includes a backing unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the panel 1150, the.

  In addition, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a light emitting decorative hole formed in a plurality so as to penetrate the game panel 1150 A panel lens member 2500 and a liquid crystal display device (“the game board side liquid crystal display capable of displaying a predetermined effect image that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and made visible from the player side according to the gaming state Device), a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control substrate box 1170 attached to the back surface of the substrate holder 1160 Have.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The front component 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the region 1100 is divided. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  In the front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is a firing rail 660 in the ball striking device 650 of the main frame 3 (FIG. 1 It is located on the extension of (see). A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning it to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball which has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100 if it is not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 etc. It is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4 .

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 and the lower space between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111. 1 (see FIG. 1) is received by the ball entry 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626, It is discharged to the lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7).

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced, and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  Further, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end of the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and vertically spaced at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 disposed, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward while the upper side is formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, In the vicinity of the left side end portion of the second embodiment, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage notch portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction from the lower end upward. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, thereby referring to the game board holding port 601 (FIG. 5). Can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction at the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is engaged with the game board By locking the stop portion, it is possible to restrict the front end right end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the game board fixture 690 (FIG. 5) is supported. The fixed piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted when the front panel is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the game board 4 The lower end of the is restricted to move forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  A function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front component 1110 in a front view.

5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 200 is disposed at the upper side of the out port 1151 at the lower center of the game area 1100 and supported by the front of the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 disposed along the front of the game panel 1150 and supported by the front of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center character 2300 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. There is.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed at the position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, A portion protruding to the front side relative to the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. Thereby, the front unit 2000 is in contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and the movement of the game ball is performed together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front of the game panel 1150. Change can be given. Further, the front unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

  It should be noted that while the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 strikes the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center character 2300, it is referred to as "left-handed", while the right side of the center character 2300 is How to hit the game balls that flow down is called "right hit".

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. Attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which gaming balls driven into gaming area 1100 can be received, and more specifically, it is arranged approximately at the center in the horizontal direction. A starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening 2102 disposed below the upper starting opening 2101, and a rectangular opening disposed below the lower starting opening 2102 and extending in the lateral direction more than the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 A shape special winning opening 2103 and a general winning opening 2104 disposed slightly upward of the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls accepted by the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, and gaming balls can be always accepted (prize winning). On the other hand, the lower starting opening 2102 disposed below the upper starting opening 2101 has a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be expanded by the starting opening solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) between the lower starting opening 2101 and the upper starting opening 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 are erected substantially vertically, the game ball can not be received by the upper start opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 to the lower start opening 2102, but the pair of movable When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the gaming ball can be received to the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the lower starting opening 2102 is a variable winning opening due to the pair of movable pieces 2106. Note that the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center combination 2300 described later.

  The winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2107 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported, and in the substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball, and the upper side moves forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 can be opened to make it possible to receive the game ball. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is accepted (start winning) by the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the special lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit"), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99).

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and gaming balls can always be accepted (winning).

  Also, although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls received to the lower starting opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting gaming balls received to the big winning opening 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is further discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. In addition, an upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects gaming balls received to the upper starting opening 2101 and a general winning opening switch 3020 that detects gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. .

5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 to which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction in the game panel 1150 Above, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 1150, and is made to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in front view in the attacker unit 2100 A general winning hole 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward and gaming balls can always be accepted (winning), and the gaming balls accepted to the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After it is detected, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is disposed at a position such that the left end thereof is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end thereof, and is inclined to become lower toward the right end. The shelf 2202 and the first shelf 2202 are disposed on the opposite side and lower side across the two general winning openings 2201 and the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and the special winning opening And the second shelf 2203 is lowered toward the side of 2103), and the game ball having flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202 may be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  The two general winning openings 2201 are disposed to the right of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the first shelf 2202 moves the game ball toward the center of the game area 1100, There is a possibility of winning to the general winning opening 2201. In addition, the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 is also provided with a third shelf 2204 inclined so as to be lower toward the center side of the game area 1100.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to be translucent as a whole, and although a detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration substrate 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is disposed on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. There is a light emitting decoration.

5-2-3. Center feature]
Next, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The center character 2300 is inserted from the front side to the opening 1158 which is formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is then fixed to the front of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is arc-shaped to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball with the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100. While being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line hanging down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 1100.

  This center character 2300 is inclined to the left from the position slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall located on the front of the game panel 1150. And when the game ball is driven to the upper part in the game area 1100, the game ball flows down through the left side of the center character 2300 when flowing down to the upper shelf 2301, and the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball which has flowed down (entered) is made to flow down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center character 2300. That is, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball intrudes to the right of the upper shelf 2301 in the center character 2300, chances of enjoying the flow of the game ball are reduced, so the game ball is strongly hit. It is possible to adjust the size of the game as appropriate, and to maintain tension and prevent the player from becoming a random game.

  In addition, the center character 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the gaming panel 1150 Warp outlet (not shown) for releasing the gaming ball into the frame, and after rolling the gaming ball released from the warp outlet in the left and right direction, it is released into the upper game area 1100 of the attacker unit 2100 and a center part And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame 2300.

  The stage 2310 in this center character 2300 is not shown in detail but a first stage to which gaming balls discharged from the warp outlet are supplied, and a gaming ball from the first stage which is disposed in front of the first stage And a second stage which is supplied and capable of releasing game balls into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 where the game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance of the lowermost front face in the center character 2300 It is discharged from the outlet 2314 into the game area 1100. This chance outlet 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming balls released from the chance outlet 2314 are accepted (winning) in the upper starting opening 2101 with high probability. ing.

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center character 2300 is formed of a transparent member so that the decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be viewed by the player through the stage 2310 It has become.

  In addition, the center character 2300 is transparent on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150 above the warp entrance 2302 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 and transparent. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in the form of a thin plate substantially from the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which the game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game balls driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center character 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 are made to flow downstream through the back side of the arch portion 2315. .

  Further, the center character 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of gaming balls in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the gaming panel 1150. The gate unit 2350 is disposed on the upper side of the arch unit 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall, and detects the gate entrance to which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter and the game ball entering the gate entrance And a gate outlet for releasing the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the gaming ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. The section 2315 looks as if it were a dive.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 is a plurality of light emission formed in the game area 1100 in the game area 1150 at a position outside the opening 1158 where the center character 2300 is inserted, in a circular or x shape to penetrate in the front-rear direction The decorative holes are lighted and decorated. The panel lens member 2500 is disposed on the surface of the transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center character 2300 and on the surface of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center character 2300, and a rear panel of the lower panel lens 2520 And a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-like lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-like insertion light guides substantially in the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a department. In the state where this insertion light guide part is inserted from the rear side to the light emission decoration hole of game panel 1150, the tip is formed so as to substantially match the front surface of game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of game panel 1150 It does not affect the ball as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can emit light and decorate the area where the game balls flow down even with the opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate As well as being able to show the player the decoration of the game panel 1150 which has never been done, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made to stand out to make it possible to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game panel 1150, and the back box 3001 supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position spaced back from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and the liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. An upper unit 3100 disposed on the upper side of the device 1900, a humanoid machine head unit 3150 disposed on the rear of the upper unit 3100 in the rear box 3001 and an upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, A character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the box 3001 and a gear decoration unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001 are mainly provided. Each unit 3100, 3150, 3400, 3500 is provided with various movable bodies.

  Further, back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to side winning opening member 2200 in front unit 2000 attached to the front of game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front A side lamp decorative substrate 3014, a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and accepted to the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game accepted to the left general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward and a right that is disposed on the right of the left guiding member 3016 and guides the gaming ball received downward to the upper starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Furthermore, although the back unit 3000 is not shown in detail, it is disposed under the lamp drive board box 3423 and the lamp drive board box 3423 which is disposed in the lower rear of the back box 3001 and accommodates the lamp drive board 4170. The motor drive board box 3430, which is disposed on the side and houses the motor drive board 4180, is fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and is disposed on the left side in a rear view of the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally elongated rectangular upper resistance substrate disposed on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. And are further provided.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center character 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3150 is formed into a predetermined shape. , 3400, 3500, etc. make it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the back unit 3000 is configured such that the various movable bodies of the units 3100, 3150, 3400, and 3500 move independently or in linkage with each other in accordance with the gaming state, and the movement causes the player to move. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the change of the game state, the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in the shape of a box whose front side is open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. In the back box 3001, a rectangular opening is formed substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player through this opening. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3150, 3400, 3500, the respective substrates 3014, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, although not shown, back box 3001 inserts and locks fixed piece 1902 on one side (right side in rear view) projecting outward from the left and right sides of liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in rear view. The liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached on the left side in the rear view of the opening, and the other side (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

5-4-2. Induction member]
Next, the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 respectively through different flow paths. A general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of gaming balls is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides the game balls received to the upper starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the right general winning opening 2104 downward to the vicinity of the lower end and is discharged downward through different flow paths. An upper starting opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow passage corresponding to the upper starting opening 2101, and a general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow passage corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The gaming balls guided downward by the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and are discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 downward to the game board 4 It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is generally formed in a horizontally long shape, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and is a lifting and lowering mechanism for lifting and lowering the rotatable decoration unit 3200 disposed on the rear side of the rotatable decoration unit 3200 and the rotatable decoration unit 3200 in front view. 3250, a swing decoration unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the lateral direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decoration unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decoration unit 3200 can be vertically moved by the lifting mechanism 3250 between the rising position located at the top of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the lowering position located approximately at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. The rotary ornament unit 3200 is configured to rotate a rotary ornament formed in a shuriken shape disposed on the front surface, and when it rotates, the rotation radius of the rotary ornament is expanded by the centrifugal force. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative unit 3200 not only rotates the rotary decorative unit to the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary decorative unit is enlarged and the appearance is largely changed. It is possible to make the player have a strong impact, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game while attracting the player's interest strongly It is possible to make it easy to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines and played.

  The swing decoration unit 3300 includes swing decoration bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotation decoration unit 3200 positioned at the raised position, and the left and right swing decoration is made according to the gaming state. The body can be swung simultaneously in the left and right direction.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with a plate-like ceiling decoration that extends horizontally in the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction around the front end side, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decorative body is turned downward according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Humanoid Machine Head Unit]
Next, the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The humanoid machine head unit 3150 is provided with a frame formed and decorated in a sunglass shape, of the head of a humanoid machine (robot) operated by a pilot in the cockpit. This frame can be lowered from the original position, which is a standby position, to a position where it is difficult to view the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front, from the original position to the approximate center of the display area of the liquid crystal display It has become. Note that the pink sphere moves in the frame by being drawn in such a manner that the pink sphere moves three-dimensionally in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the frame formed in the sunglasses shape. "Eyeball" can be expressed by doing this.

[5-4-5. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body, and can move from the position of the right end to the position toward the center side in the horizontal direction according to the game state. There is. In addition, when moving in the left-right direction, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the vertical direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around the axis where the head extends in the lateral direction, and reciprocate around the axis where the right arm extends in the vertical direction. It is possible to Thus, by turning the head back and forth, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character were crawling. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to cause the character to perform an action as if throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-6. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decorative body unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decorative body unit 3500 includes a plurality of gear decorative bodies that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction and arranged in a plurality in the vertical direction, and the respective gear decorative bodies are simultaneously in accordance with the gaming state. It is supposed to rotate.

[5-4-7. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral substrate box 1905 in which the peripheral control substrate 4140 is accommodated at the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted.

[6. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 and disposed. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko gaming machine.

  The function display unit 1180 is, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 10, a game state display made up of one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view And a special symbol memory indicator 1184 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 consisting of the unit 1183, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of the gaming state indicator 1183; A special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED arranged on the right of the special symbol memory display 1184 and displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 as a first special symbol The display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1185 arranged on the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and drawn by receiving the game ball to the lower starting opening 2102 Lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of lower special symbol display 1186, lower start opening A lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding acceptance of the game ball to 2102 is provided.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game ball. And a normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs, and arranged under the normal symbol memory display, for displaying a normal lottery result selected as the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 as a normal symbol Opening and closing of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged side by side to the diagonal upper right side of the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (the number of rounds).

  The game state indicator 1183 is a full color LED capable of changing its light emission color of red, green and orange, and various game states (a combination of a light emission color to emit light and lighting and blinking) For example, it is possible to display a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a definite variation time short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, and the like.

  The upper special symbol memory display 1184 suspends the start of the variable display when the gaming ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101 when the first special symbol can not be changed and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The stored number of stored first special symbols is displayed. This special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b The blinking pattern makes it possible to display the number of reservations. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of the variable display when the gaming ball is received in the lower starting opening 2102 when the second special symbol can not be changed and displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186 ( The stored number of stored second special symbols is displayed. The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. The blinking pattern makes it possible to display the number of reservations. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four Both are supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 The 7-segment LED is stopped after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is played by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the 7 segment LED stopped Can be made to be recognized by

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full color LED capable of changing its light emission color of red, green and orange, and by combining the light emission color to emit light and lighting and blinking, the gate 2350 is played It is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by passing a ball. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol memory display 1188 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol whose start of the variable display is reserved (stored) The number of reservations (the number of memories) is displayed. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of reservations. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present embodiment, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 is provided with a two-round indicator lamp 1190a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a fifteen-round indicator lamp 1190b, and the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be indicated by lighting each lamp It is supposed to be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 There is. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round indicator 1190 is attached to the front of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. Have the store clerks in the hall recognize the position of function display unit 1180 without confusion So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board, power supply board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 14 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 16 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is, as shown in FIG. 11, a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data. , A main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit 4100d and a blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitoring a sign of a blackout or an instantaneous blackout of a predetermined voltage are mainly included.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") in main control MPU 4100a. In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function without a reset terminal is not provided And consists of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb has the information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 8, an upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls entering the upper starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls entering the lower starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Also, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate unit 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting gaming balls having entered the general winning opening 2201, and a special winning opening 2103 A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls and a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet are panel relays attached to the game board 4 A terminal plate 4161 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100 a through the main control input circuit 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function A control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting opening solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or the predetermined output. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca through the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191, the upper special symbol display 1185, Special symbol indicator 1186, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183 and round indicator 1190 drive signals Output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100 ca with reset function, the main control output with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. As the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and passes frequently through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 The detection of gaming balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, as the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch with a long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. The payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of pachinko gaming machine 1 from payout control board 4110 as serial data by main control input circuit 4100b, whereby the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main cycle serial transmission port 4100ae etc. which is one of various main control serial I / O ports is connected to the bus 4100ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 25). The main rotation serial transmission port 4100 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100 aea, a transmission buffer register 4100 aeb, and a serial management unit 4100 aec (see FIG. See 25). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data is started. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. The main control CPU core 4100aa sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 continuously by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting the plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

  Power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 17). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control MPU 4100a to completely erase from the main control internal RAM It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls includes a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a having various functions, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying.

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls related to payout is a microprocessor including a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A payout control input circuit 4120 b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 4120 c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. A payout motor drive circuit 4120 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 4120 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 4120 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 4120 b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 4120 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 4120 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4120 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals inputted to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payment function output control circuit 4120 cb does not have reset function. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and the counting switch 751 for detecting gaming balls flowing down in the prize ball passage of the prize ball device 740 It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a through the inner substrate 754 of the ball assembly of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120 b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 is first of all, the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740, the prize ball case inner substrate 754, It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the signal.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full is stored in the game ball, the handle relay terminal board 192, the power supply board 851 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a via the payout control input circuit 4120 b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of the serial input port. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4120 cb as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120 cb to the main control board 4100. When the normal control of the various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 is completed as serial data, the main control substrate 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, thereby a payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 4120 d from the above, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4120 d to the payout motor 744 through the prize ball inner substrate 754 or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state of the gaming machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, the drive signal from the reset function payout control output circuit 4120ca is an error LED indicator 860b Output to

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Report that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 4110, and if the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the switch 750, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotor and the gaming ball are engaged near the entrance, making the payout rotor difficult to rotate. Report that it has been When "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is "counting switch error" (specifically, it indicates that the counting switch 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and the numeral " When “5” is displayed, it informs that “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When there is a "full tank" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is informed that the storage space of the fal cover unit 540 is full with stored gaming balls), When the number "7" is displayed, it is reported that "CR not connected" (electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). And, when the number "9" is displayed, it informs that it is "in stock" (specifically, the fact that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) There is.

  The content displayed on the error LED display 860b is also displayed on the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. The store clerk or the like in the hall displays the content displayed on the error LED display 860b in the display area of the portable terminal 470 before opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 It is possible to know by The specific screen on which the content displayed on the error LED display 860b is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be described later.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc., to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby a payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown. The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hall computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and a main control board 4100 for proceeding with the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a payout control board for controlling payout and the like An abnormal voltage is applied to the 4110 to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the lending ball unit 360 shown in FIG. And, a game ball or the like is input to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial system to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and at the same time, displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. There is.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 17) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof via the payout control input circuit 4120b, the predetermined of the payout control MPU 4120a The payout control MPU 4120a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 4120a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this, it is triggered by the payout control MPU 4120a from the payout control built-in RAM It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120 cb without reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 4120 cb without reset function to the main control board 4100.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. The gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as shown in FIG. 13, relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control substrate 4110, in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal plate 880 and frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal plate 869, between the substrate of the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 4110, the game device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 4110 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  On the part side of the frequency display plate 365, the ball rental switch 365a, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  In the ball lending switch 365 a and the return switch 365 b, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending switch 365a is pressed and operated, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return switch 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a game ball rental device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The remaining power number display 365c is formed by arranging three segment displays in parallel, and among the three-digit segment displays, one digit of the segment displays is sequentially driven. The segment indicator of the is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency display 365 c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency display 365c is comprised of digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for specifying one-digit segment display among three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up, from the CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board When input through 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be viewed through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365 c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 by the built-in voltage generation circuit, and the ball lending switch 365 a and the return switch 365 b are in the ball lending possible state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental switch 365a is pressed from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball connection device plate 869 when the ball rental button 361 is pressed. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 so that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the rental ball button 361 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount of money corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the pressing of the rental ball button 361.

7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply substrate 851 will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 851 has a power switch 852 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 855 for generating various power supplies. And a launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and sphere feeding control by the sphere delivery solenoid 585 of the sphere delivery unit 580 shown in FIG. 1. When AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply substrate 851, it is first supplied to the power switch 852 via the fuse 851 a.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power supply control unit 855 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a and the synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 852 is operated. A power factor improving circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor improving circuit 855b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates When the voltage supplied to the power supply generation circuit 855d for generating the power supply and the power supply generation circuit 855d exceeds a predetermined voltage, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, and the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko facility is electrically And a power source destruction circuit 855e to be disconnected.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 857, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585, mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a, an electrolytic capacitor 857b, and a wasting prevention circuit 857c. The launch control circuit 857a is an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 for electrically adjusting the intensity (launch intensity) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front handle 506 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a release stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball according to the intention of the player, and is input via the handle relay terminal board 192, When a detection signal from touch switch 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is in contact with rotary handle body front 506 is input to power supply substrate 851 via handle relay terminal plate 192, useless hit prevention circuit 857c. It is input through. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  The firing control circuit 857a steps down a predetermined DC power supply (a DC +37 V power supply to be described later) among various DC power supplies supplied from the power generation circuit 855 d to drive a shooting solenoid DC power supply (DC +35 V (DC +35 V, hereinafter, “ Described as “+35 V”))) and a drive current for launching (playing) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and adjusting and firing The ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 is the dish shown in FIG. 7 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 through the launch solenoid drive circuit 857ab for performing output control to the solenoid 654 and the handle relay terminal plate 192. One game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 is received, and the ball transport member receives it. And Tamaoku solenoid drive circuit 857ac for controlling sending to hitting launcher 650 side game balls that are composed mainly of.

  The discharge control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC drive (+35 V) for the solenoid drive stepped down in the DC / DC converter 857aa is By being applied, the electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged. A combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 857aa and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. Launch solenoid drive circuit 857 ab controls the drive current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward gaming area 1100 based on the operation signal from potentiometer 512, adjusting the merging current and outputting it to launch solenoid 654. Is going. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 857 ac performs control to output a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 by DC +24 V described later among various DC power sources supplied from the power generation circuit 855 d.

  If the firing control circuit 857a determines based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated at least the right-handed setting position described later, the right-handed game is played The right control signal indicating that there is a signal is output to the discharge control board 4110 as a discharge right control signal. This output is output via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) and is an open collector output. The launch control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness). When it is determined that the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated beyond the right-handed setting position described later, the collector terminals of the transistors of the right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) When it is determined that the rotation position of the front handle of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated beyond the right hitting setting position described later while being pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic of the payout right hitting signal becomes LOW. In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the collector terminals of the transistors of the striking signal output circuit are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110 Electrically connected to the other end and pulled up to +12 V side Signal logic of the HI.

  When the power is shut off, the wasteful hit prevention circuit 857c discharges the power by shutting off the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b and flowing to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab to thereby flow to the firing solenoid 654 as a drive current It is a circuit which can prevent discharge of the wasted ball of the game ball in. The detailed description will be described later.

7-4. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4140 is, as shown in FIG. 14, a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and drawing control and main body of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from a speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 Communication control unit 4162 for wirelessly exchanging various information (various data) in two ways with 470 and a real-time clock (calendar information holding calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying , Described as “RTC.) Provided in the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the control unit 4165 and the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 And a, and volume adjustment volume 4140a be adjusted by the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 to the turning operation.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control performs peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, peripheral control ROM 4150b storing various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, which will be described later. Various information (for example, drawing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is input. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data that defines the screen, schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc., and various information that continues across the day (for example, a big hit gaming state) Information or special information for managing the history of occurrence Peripheral control SRAM 4150 d which stores information for managing effect flags, etc., and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150 e for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 4150 a is operating normally (hereinafter, “peripheral control external WDT 4150 e It describes as ".).

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the backup power is supplied by a large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 851. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 851, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and therefore the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is out of control, and when the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it does not reset.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various signals via the gaming information display device DCNT disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the parallel I / O port for gaming information display device. The gaming information display device DCNT is provided with a plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) on both sides of the data display unit DCNTa, centering on the data display unit DCNTa for displaying information related to gaming, and below the decorative lamp on the left side. A call button DCNTb for calling a store clerk or the like in a hall is disposed, and an operation button DCNTc for switching information related to a game displayed on the data display unit DCNTa is disposed below the decoration lamp on the right side. The information regarding the game includes, for example, the number of times of big hit, the number of times of fluctuation until the big hit, and the number of continuations of the big hit, the time when the player left the seat (the gaming information display device DCNT leaves the player's seat Also has the function of clocking time). The information about these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall through the pachinko island facility.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the operation unit 400 and a pressure detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 The detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, It is input to the operation unit detecting serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 4150 e It is diagnosed whether it is

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It comprises an / O port 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae and WDT 4150af Various data are read / written to / from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, and WDT 4150 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 4150 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 4150 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150 b, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad and external bus 4150 h are used for storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150 b, peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150 ad and the peripheral bus 4150 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control. Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 4150 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the movable body detection data from the game board serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for motor drive board of peripheral control MPU 4150a, or the upper decoration in the door frame 5 It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and when the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a is turned, the resistance value is changed, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob portion The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) so as to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 Music and sound effects are made to flow from the provided speaker 130. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an injustice against the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents related to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be rendered more powerful, or it may be notified that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, or the like. Notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. And the volume control from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the program by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even if the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating In the mode, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to produce the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-4-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music and sound effects, etc. The schedule data for sound generation which generates H, and the electric drive source schedule data which generates the drive mode of electric drive sources, such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is defined. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers are specified for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, but they may be copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 4150b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 4150c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. The brightness setting information is, as will be described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance is 85% which is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and lighted.

7-4-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, as shown in FIG. 15, a backup for exclusively storing the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. Management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copied various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and peripheral control ROM 4150b The various control program copy area 4150 cd, which exclusively stores the copied various control programs, and the various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b A control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data for exclusive use, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among the various information updated by the execution of the control program A work area 4150 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged object work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc, the power on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 34) starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. And instructs to start the state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) When it is) it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150 ca is various information that is updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs It consists of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 4150 cb to backup second area 4 150 cc to be described later are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As described later, “(1fr)” causes the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to output drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the portable terminal 470 When the V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, the V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4 150 a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received. Then, since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame), “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information The same meaning also applies to (1fr) and the effect backup information (1fr) described later. “(1 ms)” is “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, and “(1 ms)”, since the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. The statements appended to “Bank 3” and “Bank 4” are used (the same applies to the effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms described later)).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab, a reception command storage area 4150 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 4150 cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and receives various received commands. A storage area to which various commands transmitted from the portable terminal 470 are received and to which the various received commands are set. There is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC41654a described later) is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad. The main control board 4100 is stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. It is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b to various control data copy areas 4150 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. Some are set. Note that Bank 0 (1 fr) is also provided with a portable terminal transmission command storage area and a game information display device output data storage area (not shown). In the transmission command storage area for portable terminals, various kinds of information from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 in addition to various commands for activating the application installed in advance on the portable terminal 470 and displaying various screens. Is a storage area in which various commands for transmitting a message are set, and a storage area in which various data for outputting various signals to the game information display device DCNT is set in the game data display device output data storage area. .

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, etc. It is done. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 ca The various information (for example, the operation unit 400) which acquired the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided are set. In addition, a game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) is also provided in Bank 0 (1 ms). The gaming information display device information acquisition storage region is a storage region in which various information of the gaming information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from the gaming information display device DCNT.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, and the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1 ms). The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. The door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage region 4150 cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf are opened on the door side. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 4150 cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the processing is advanced based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 ca. In the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and to be stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is operated to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, backup 1st area 4150cb manages Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 4150 cc, Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The data is copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 cb has a total of two pairs of the Bank 1 (1 fr) and the Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and the Bank 1 (1 ms) and the Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 4150cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the first backup area 4150 cb and the second backup area 4150 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-4-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a includes a backup management target work area 4150 da for exclusive storage of information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 4150 db and a second backup area 4150 dc are provided, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is a power on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 34) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure). RAM clear effect start and each state effect start are instructed (for example, the start of effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power on or Not even zero clear). This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are zero cleared. In addition, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state etc.) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c are not displayed at all, and can not be cleared in the setting mode, while they can be cleared. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150 da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 4150 db to backup second area 4 150 dc described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As “(SRAM)” is backed up with various information stored in peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” And “Bank 4” respectively (the same applies to the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

  Next, a backup first area 4150 db and a backup second area 4150 dc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150 dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of the page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and a backup second area An area 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the head and the end of each page, that is, at the head and the end of the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control Unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 and the sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 to be performed has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in sound source") for performing sound control such as music and sound effects. In addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game panel built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as sound effects, serialized music and sound effects, etc. And a, and audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as chromatography audio data.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The start screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 After extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae Output to VDP4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4150a starts the sound command data of the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and extracted in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c is extracted with the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c Output to the built-in VDP4160a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives the V blank signal as the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. VRAM for creating drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 by creating sprite data by extracting side character data and upper dish character data (Hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 are synchronized by outputting to the portable terminal 470 from CH 2 via the communication control unit 4162. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is input Character data is extracted from liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on screen data to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on gaming board liquid crystal display device 1900 and portable terminal 470 is built in Of the generated drawing data generated on the VRAM, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image data for the portable terminal 470 is communicated from the channel CH2 Mobile end via control unit 4162 And outputs it to 470. That is, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 on the built-in VRAM. Data for

  Further, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, and transmits image data for the portable terminal 470 from the channel CH2 to the communication control unit 4162. When the signal is output to the portable terminal 470 via the peripheral device, it outputs to the peripheral control MPU 4150a a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is generally set to 30 fps, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately It is 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later in response to the input of the V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470. Also, in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and to the portable terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162.

  When the sound command data is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from main control board 4100, sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number It sets output channels and serializes music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated to adjust the Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as a sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and operated by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of output sound sources in the built-in sound source Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and amplifies the amplified effect sound as audio data The audio data transmission IC 4160 c is designed to output the data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the speaker volume 820 provided on the main body frame 3 is amplified by the master volume value. The volume of the sound flowing from the speakers housed in and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker 130 provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated, serializes this amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c for the notification sound. Are the sound data of the notification sound incorporated into the used track and the sound of the notification sound incorporated into the used track The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually synthesized by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value to adjust the Amplify up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from a speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and amplify the amplified notification sound into audio data as audio data Output to transmission IC 4160 c.

  Here, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1. A brief description will be given of the control for sending an alarm sound to notify a store clerk or the like in the wrongdoing. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually provided on the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows as the sound that flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5 in practice. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the effect sound is for the aforementioned sound generation Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the time period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute so far is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a and adjusting the substrate volume It is set again as the volume value (in this case, when the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub The speaker and the speaker frame provided in the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3). So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  As described above, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the notification sound flows in order to notify the store clerk of the hall against the illegal activity against the sound, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided to the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 Since the effect sound that has become muffled is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data although it flows from the speaker 130, the speaker which is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of a notification sound elapses And when the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 does not flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 16, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b has game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and an upper tray for drawing in the display area of the portable terminal 470. Character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is a plus signal and minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-3. Communication control unit]
A communication control unit 4162 for exchanging various information (various data) with the portable terminal 470 in a bidirectional manner by wireless communication is configured around a communication control circuit 4162a as shown in FIG. The communication control circuit 4162a is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a as shown in FIG. Peripheral control MPU 4150a and communication control circuit 4162a exchange control signals with each other, and peripheral control MPU 4150a manages the operation state of communication control circuit 4162a. When the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d. The obtained information is input as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a to the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal to the communication control circuit 4162a from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and the portable terminal 470 Communication initialization is performed to exchange information (various data) by radio in both directions. By this communication initialization, as described above, of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a transmits image data for the portable terminal 470 from the channel CH2 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the communication control unit 4162. When output to the terminal 470, the image data from the channel CH2 is rendered in the display area of the portable terminal 470. That is, by rendering the image data generated in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the display area of the portable terminal 470, various effects can be developed.

7-4-4. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds, is configured around an RTC 4165a, as shown in FIG. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 for December 25th, and the screen for performing a New Year countdown for New Year's Eve It can be exemplified that the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 are unfolded. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa There is. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in steps of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is set to ON / OFF control or ON only of the backlight. ing.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as display tests of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is inputted in the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is powered on first It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted on the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information etc. stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright in the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side liquid crystal when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information for identifying the date. Acquire the time information that specifies minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range in which the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on and the current date, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% to the correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 0b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

7-4-5. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a rotates the knob such as the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak has the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (the sound source built-in VDP 4160a) so as to obtain the volume set in the substrate volumes 0-6 Music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 130.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sound for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1; It announces the contents about the game effect etc. (For example, it is highly probable that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player is high. And so forth)) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4 with built-in sound source) by program. So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even if the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating In the mode, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the game to create a more powerful screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 in addition to music and sound effects, or shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of doing.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, and the rendering sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 or the pressure operation unit 405 There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame 3 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is entered, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is made. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and this screen is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted by the store clerk and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, The volume can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted in the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the operation unit 400 A desired volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer, the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly operating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player adjusting the volume so small that it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and the last time a user sits down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the player who was playing a game feels loudly and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game controls the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400 this time It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply substrate will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to a power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into an AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power supply outlet that is a power supply voltage for pachinko facilities and a pachinko island facility. The AC 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine from the above, is applied to the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 via the fuse 851a. When the power switch 852 is operated, the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko facility is supplied into the power supply substrate 851 via the power switch 852 to turn on the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the power supply substrate 851 includes a power control unit 855 and a emission control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 creates various DC voltages from AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and commercials AC 100 V (AC 100 V), which is higher than 24 V AC (24 V AC) power supply voltage for gaming machines. When the power supply voltage is supplied, the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected to make the power supply substrate 851 unusable or to supply backup power to the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110. The portion 857 is a circuit for controlling the drive of the launch solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

  The power control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power generation circuit 855d, a power destruction circuit 855e, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24 V, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine supplied from a pachinko island facility, is supplied to a game apparatus connection terminal board 869 via a power supply substrate 851, and is also supplied to a synchronous rectification circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 855b via the power supply destruction circuit 855e.

  The power supply breakdown circuit 855e is mainly configured of a field effect transistor (FET), and when the circuit breakdown signal from the power supply generation circuit 855d is input, its own circuit is destroyed and supplied from the pachinko island facility By setting the short mode state in which the power supply voltage is shorted to the ground, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected, and the power supply substrate 851 can not be used.

  The power factor correction circuit 855b improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter referred to as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855 c. ing. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple to smooth + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively. The plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for pachinko island equipment, and has a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V (AC 24 V) which is the power supply voltage If it is accidentally inserted into a certain AC 100 V (AC 100 V) power outlet, a power supply voltage higher than +37 V will be created and supplied to the smoothing circuit 855 c.

  Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 4120a of payout control unit 4120 in payout control board 4110 It supplies backup power to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power source and provides gaming balls with launch strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506 shown in FIG. While adjusting the drive current for launching (projecting) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 and performing control to output to the firing solenoid 654, a constant current is output to the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 Thus, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 and sends the gaming ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball striking device 650 side. Take control.

  Specifically, emission control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded (GND), and DC / DC converter 857aa shown in FIG. 12 of emission control circuit 857a. The DC voltage (+35 V) for driving the solenoid is created by stepping down +37 V supplied from the power supply generation circuit 855 d at this time, and the DC voltage (+35 V) for driving the solenoid is applied to the electrolytic capacitor 857 b. It is supposed to be A combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 857aa and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows into the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. It has become. That is, the electrolytic capacitor 857b has a function as an auxiliary power supply. The firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab is an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506 shown in FIG. Based on the above, control is performed to adjust the merging current and to output to the firing solenoid 654 a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 857 ac shown in FIG. 12 of the launch control circuit 857 a performs control to output a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 by +24 V supplied from the power supply generation circuit 855 d.

  The waste shot prevention circuit 857c discharges and discharges the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b when a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control substrate 4100 described later is input through the payout control substrate 4110. By preventing the flow to the discharge solenoid 654 as a drive current by flowing to the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, it is possible to prevent the discharge of the wasted ball of the gaming ball at the time of power shutoff.

  The power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (+12 V DC, hereinafter to +12 V), and DC +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) are respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. Also, although not shown, +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V are respectively supplied to the emission control unit 857. The power supply system supplied with +5 V is a +5 V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12 V is a +12 V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24 V is a +24 V power supply line.

  The power supply generation circuit 855 d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage supplied from the smoothing circuit 855 c. The plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the pachinko island facility's power supply voltage, and AC which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the 24 V AC (24 V AC) power supply voltage. If the power supply outlet of 100 volts (AC 100 V) is mistakenly inserted, the smoothing circuit 855 c supplies a power supply voltage higher than +37 V to the power generation circuit 855 d. When the magnitude of the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined value (the threshold value is set to about 50 V in the present embodiment), the power supply generation circuit 855 d performs various operations such as +5 V, +12 V and +24 V described above. Before creating and outputting a power supply voltage, a circuit destruction signal is output to the power supply destruction circuit 855 e. When the circuit breakdown signal is input, as described above, the power supply breakdown circuit 855 e is in a short mode state in which its circuit is broken and the power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is shorted to the ground. The power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied in the order of fuse 851a, power switch 852, synchronous rectification circuit 855a, power destruction circuit 855e, power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c, and power generation circuit 855d. Therefore, when the power supply destruction circuit 855e is shorted, a large current flows to the fuse 851a by flowing a large current toward the fuse 851a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectification circuit 855a, and the shorted power supply destruction circuit 855e. 851 a is electrically disconnected. That is, the plug of the power cord 851 is not inserted into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for pachinko island facilities, and is higher than the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. The power supply destruction circuit 855e is destroyed to make it unusable even if it is accidentally inserted into a 100 VAC (100 VAC) power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage, and various power supply voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V are not output at all The circuit configuration is

  The +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855 d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 through the payout control substrate 4110. The +5 V production circuit 4100 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a from +12 V from the payout control substrate 4110. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100 a via the main control filter circuit 4100 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control substrate 4110. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected by the electrical connection method in which the +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 returns from the payout control substrate 4110 to the power supply substrate 851 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d is not supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the stored content is held by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 4100. That is, +5 V created by +5 V creation circuit 4100 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of main control MPU 4100 a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM being in the forward direction by diode MD0 and the plus terminal of capacitor BC0 Current flows toward the As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. It can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g can create +5 V. When the main control substrate 4100 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control substrate 4100 through the payout control substrate 4110, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

  In a transformer (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility, 100 volts AC (AC 100 V) which is a commercial power supply voltage is converted into 24 volts AC (24 V AC) which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines. Some ball rental machines provided adjacent to a pachinko gaming machine are operated by being supplied with AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines, and are operated by being supplied with AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage. A power outlet for supplying a power supply voltage for a gaming machine and a commercial power supply voltage is provided in the pachinko island facility. For this reason, the clerk of the hall and the worker who installs the pachinko gaming machine (replaces the game board) etc. plug the power cord (wiring) for supplying the pachinko gaming machine with the power supply voltage. If the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on by accidentally plugging it into the AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power voltage, instead of the power outlet, the AC100V, which is a commercial power voltage, is the AC24V power voltage for a gaming machine. Because it is higher, the fuse of pachinko gaming machine is cut off electrically and it will be in the state that can not play, but abnormal voltage is output from the power supply board instantaneously, main control board, payout control board, peripheral control board, It is supplied to various substrates such as a lamp drive substrate and a motor drive substrate to cause damage.

  Replace the fuse, plug the power cord (wiring) into the AC 24V power outlet for the gaming machine, turn on the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine, and then turn on the power. That is, AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine, and damage is caused to electric driving sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on various substrates and gaming boards of pachinko gaming machines. Since it is in the given state, for example, the excitation current continues to flow through the motor or solenoid controlled by the peripheral control board or the motor drive board to generate heat, and parts around the motor or solenoid are deformed or melted. Problems will arise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for pachinko island facilities, but from the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. The power supply generation circuit 855d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage when the power supply voltage is incorrectly inserted into a high AC power supply voltage of 100 volts AC (AC 100 V), and the power supply voltage supplied is a predetermined value. (Threshold: In this embodiment, when it reaches about 50 V.), the circuit of the power supply destruction circuit 855 e is generated before creating and outputting the various power supply voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V described above. It is designed to output a destruction signal. When this circuit destruction signal is input, the power supply destruction circuit 855 e is put into a short mode state in which its circuit is destroyed and the power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko facility is shorted to the ground as described above. As a result, a large current flows toward the fuse 851a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectification circuit 855a, and the short circuited power destruction circuit 855e, whereby a large current flows to the fuse 851a, and the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected. Various power supply voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V are not output at all. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the pachinko island facility's power supply voltage, and has a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the game power supply voltage. If a certain AC 100 volt (AC 100 V) power supply outlet is accidentally inserted, no abnormal power supply voltage is output.

  As described above, the power supply substrate 851 is not plugged into a power supply outlet of 24 V AC (24 V AC) which is the power supply voltage of the pachinko island facility for the power cord plug, but 24 V AC (24 V AC) ) Even if it is accidentally inserted into a 100 VAC (100 VAC) power outlet, which is a higher commercial power supply voltage, no abnormal power supply voltage will be output, causing damage to its own circuit called the power supply destruction circuit 855 e. Damage to the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable boards provided on the various boards and the game board 4 except the power supply board 851. Absent. Therefore, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet that is the power supply voltage for pachinko island facilities, and a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V AC (24 V AC) that is the power supply voltage for game machines. Even if it is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of 100 AC (AC 100 V), electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable boards provided on various boards and game boards 4 of pachinko gaming machine 1 By preventing the damaged state, for example, it is possible to prevent the excitation current from continuously flowing through the motor or solenoid controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the motor drive board 4180 to generate heat, or the motor or solenoid It can also prevent surrounding parts from being deformed or melted. Therefore, the abnormal power supply voltage is prevented from being output from the power supply substrate 851 when the AC 100 volts (AC 100 V) which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines is supplied. In addition, the power supply substrate 851 can be disabled.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the pachinko island facility's power supply voltage, and has a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the game power supply voltage. Even if it is accidentally inserted into an AC 100 V power outlet, a portion that is damaged is identified as the power destruction circuit 855 e of the power substrate 851. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for pachinko island facilities, and a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the power supply voltage for game machines. The electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on various boards of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the game board 4 when it is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of 100 AC (AC 100 V) Etc. are all received in the power supply destruction circuit 855 e of the power supply substrate 851.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) power outlet, which is the pachinko island facility's power supply voltage, and has a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 V (AC 24 V), which is the game power supply voltage. When the power destruction circuit 855e is broken by accidentally inserting into a certain AC 100 V power outlet, the fuse 851a is replaced and the plug of the power cord is the power supply voltage of the pachinko island facility for a gaming machine Even if it is plugged into a 24 VAC (24 VAC) power outlet, the power supply destruction circuit 855 e is already broken and shorted, so the fuse 851 a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectification circuit 855 a, as described above. Then, a large current flows toward the shorted power supply destruction circuit 855e. Accordingly, a large current flows in the fuse 851a, so that the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected. In other words, if the power supply destruction circuit 855e does not replace the power supply substrate 851 that has already been destroyed with a normal power supply substrate 851 whose power destruction circuit 855e is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is at the power supply voltage for pachinko island facilities Even if it is plugged into a certain AC 24V power outlet, it is impossible to start playing the game.

  In addition, the clerk of the hall, the worker who installs the pachinko gaming machine 1 (replaces the game board 4), etc. uses the plug of the power cord (wiring) for supplying the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the power supply voltage. If the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on by accidentally plugging in the AC 100 V power outlet which is the commercial power supply voltage instead of the AC 24 V power outlet, the power destruction circuit 855 e will be destroyed as a trace. Therefore, even if a store clerk or worker in the hall claims that "the power can not be turned on even if the plug of the power coat is plugged into the power outlet, it may not be the initial failure." Mistakes) can not be cheated (cannot be excuses).

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 855 d of the power source substrate 851 are supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Further, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power generation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral circuits are connected via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  The three voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 4140 are, as shown in FIG. 18A, a drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170 a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. It is supplied to 4180a respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the board 4.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a +3.3 V creation circuit 4140 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V created by the +3.3 V creation circuit 4140 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900 a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1900 b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and to the charging circuit 460 a of the portable terminal charging device 460. The charging circuit 460a changes the magnetic flux of the transmitting coil by controlling the current supplied to the transmitting coil (not shown), and changes the magnetic flux from the transmitting coil to the receiving coil (not shown) of the portable terminal 470. The portable terminal 470 can be charged by charging it.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 18B. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 includes a +9 V creation circuit 194 a that creates +12 V to +9 V DC (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”) supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 5 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
The payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 17, includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110 a is supplied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 and removes noise from the +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is further supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120 b and the like of the payout control unit 4120 and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 through the payout control substrate 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the gaming field (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110 without being used in the payout control substrate 4110 at all.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like, a +5 V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e and the like. The +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied with +12 V from the power supply substrate 851 via the payout control substrate 4110, and creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a from this +12 V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 4100 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 and the +5 V power supply line created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control substrate 4100, and the +5 V of the main control substrate 4100 is configured. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 4100a. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100 b and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 4100 d and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 851 via the payout control substrate 4110, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e detects the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a blackout notice signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a blackout notice. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120 a through the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120 b of the payout control substrate 4110. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the waste shot prevention circuit 857 c of the emission control unit 857 of the power supply substrate 851 through the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. The blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Power supply board launch control circuit]
Next, the emission control circuit 857a of the emission control unit 857 in the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the rotation range of the rotation handle front 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 will be described, and then the rotation angle of the rotation handle front 506 and the rotation angle of the rotation handle front 506 will be detected. The relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the output of the potentiometer 512 is described according to the rotation angle of the front of the rotary handle main body ) The setting current to the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 12 for rotationally driving the hitting ball 656 shown in FIG. 5 for obtaining the firing strength is described, and the game is performed to the shooting solenoid 654 and the hitting launching device 650 shown in FIG. The driving timing with the ball feeding solenoid 585 shown in FIG. It will be described circuit 857c. FIG. 19 (a) is a view showing the rotation range of the rotation angle in front of the rotation handle main body, and FIG. 19 (b) is a view showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer and the rotation angle in front of the rotation handle main body FIG. 20 (a) shows an example of the output characteristic of the potentiometer, FIG. 20 (b) is a table showing the set current to the launch solenoid, and FIG. 21 shows the launch solenoid and the ball feed solenoid respectively. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart for driving, and FIG. 22 is a circuit diagram showing a wasted shot prevention circuit.

9-1. Rotation range in front of rotating handle body]
First, the rotation range of the rotary handle body front 506 of the handle device 500 will be described with reference to FIG. When the player is not operating the rotary handle main body 506, the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is at the original position (zero degree (0 (0)), which is the minimum rotational position, as shown in FIG. °)). When the rotation handle body front 506 is rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) and the rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506 reaches 10 degrees (10 °), the launch shown in FIG. It becomes the release stop switch release position where it can operate the one-shot button that operates stop switch 518, and it is further turned clockwise to reach 100 degrees (100 °) of the rotational position of rotary handle front 506. A right-handed state in which the game ball is fired toward the game area 1100 so as to flow down the right side of the center character 2300 disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100 partitioned on the game board 4 shown in FIG. When it reaches the right hitting setting position where it can be turned and it is further turned clockwise, the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506 is 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotational position. Reach. In this maximum rotation position, it is not possible to turn the rotary handle front 506 further clockwise.

  Thus, the range of the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle front 506 extends from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotation position to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotation position clockwise. It is a range.

9-2. Relationship between the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body and the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the relationship between the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle front 506 and the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 for detecting the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle front 506 will be described. Explain. As described above, the rotary handle front 506 can be rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotational position to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotational position. it can. The detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is configured to transmit and rotate the rotation of the rotary handle front 506 via the gear mechanism 519. By this gear mechanism 519, the rotation of the rotary handle front 506 is enlarged by 1.5 times, and the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is rotated. The potentiometer 512 can rotate from 300 degrees (300 degrees) to zero degrees (0 degrees), and accordingly, when the rotary handle front 506 is turned clockwise, It is designed to rotate from 300 degrees (300 degrees) to zero degrees (0 degrees).

  As described above, the range of the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is in the range of 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degrees (0 °).

  When the front 506 of the rotating handle main body rotates one degree (1 °), the rotation is transmitted to the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 via the gear mechanism 519 which enlarges this rotation by 1.5 times, and the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512: It is designed to rotate 5 degrees (1.5 degrees). When the rotary handle front 506 is rotated from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotational position clockwise to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotational position, The resistance value which is the output is designed to be reduced linearly. That is, when the rotary handle front 506 is rotated from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotational position clockwise to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotational position, there is no potentiometer The rotational axis of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated from 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degree (0 °) through the gear mechanism 519 and the resistance value which is the output of the potentiometer 512 is It becomes smaller linearly. As described above, in the present embodiment, a so-called “B curve” variable resistor is adopted as the potentiometer 512, in which the resistance value which is the output of the potentiometer 512 changes linearly due to the rotation of the detection shaft.

  There is a play of up to about 10 degrees (10 °) in the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512, and in order to absorb this play, the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is zero degree (0 °). ), The rotational position of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is previously adjusted to be 290 degrees (290 °) minus 300 degrees (300 °) by 10 degrees (10 °) of the idle part. There is. When the rotary handle main body front 506 is turned and the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 reaches 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction from zero degree (0 °) which is the original position As described above, the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512 is 290 degrees (290 degrees) by the rotation of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 being magnified by 1.5 times and transmitted through the gear mechanism 519 as described above. Through 110 degrees (= 290 degrees (290 degrees)-120 degrees (120 degrees) x 1.5 times), and the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. The range is from 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees).

9-3. Relationship between rotation angle of detection shaft of potentiometer and output of potentiometer]
Next, the relationship between the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the output of the potentiometer 512 will be described with reference to FIG. The potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor whose resistance value can be varied from 0 (zero) to 10 k ohms (kΩ), and the rotation of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 linearly changes the output resistance value It is a thing. The output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 10 kΩ which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °) as shown in FIG. When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion is 10 degrees (10 °), it is set to be zero Ω (0 Ω) which is zero% (0%).

  In the present embodiment, the output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 100% in a range where the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is from 300 degrees (300 °) to 290 degrees (290 °). The output of the potentiometer 512 is set to zero percent (0%) in a range where the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion ranges from 10 degrees (10 °) to zero degrees (0 °).

9-4. Set current to the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle of the rotating handle body front 506]
Next, the setting current to the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 12 for rotationally driving the hitting ball 656 shown in FIG. 5 for obtaining the firing strength corresponding to (appropriate) the rotation angle of the rotary handle front 506 This will be described with reference to 20 (b). The set current to the firing solenoid 654 is, as shown in FIG. 20B, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 when the rotation angle .theta. The rotation angle φ is 290 degrees (290 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 is 100% (10 kΩ), so that the current of 0.93 A is adjusted, and the rotation angle θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is released When the position is 10 degrees (10 °), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of potentiometer 512 is 275 degrees (275 °), and the output of potentiometer 512 is 94.6% (9.46 kΩ) Is adjusted to a current of 1.04 A, and the rotation angle .theta. Of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is 100.degree. The rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 125 degrees (125 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 is 41.1% (4.11 kΩ), so the current is adjusted to 2.10 A and the rotation handle When the rotation angle θ of the front of the main body 506 is 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotation position, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 110 degrees (110 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 is 35. By 7% (3.57 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 2.21 A.

  When the rotary handle main body front 506 is operated to rotate, the game ball is fired from the ball hitting and launching device 650 with a firing strength according to the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506, and the outer rail 1111 shown in FIG. It is guided toward the game area 1100 by the inner rail 1112.

  When the rotation angle θ of the front 506 of the rotation handle body is at the original position of zero degree (0 °), as described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 290 degrees (290 °). The output of 512 is 100% (10 kΩ), so that the current is adjusted to 0.93 A. At this moment, at the moment the player grabs the front of the rotary handle 506, a current of 0.93 A flows to the firing solenoid 654, but at this firing strength, the firing rail 660 (see FIG. 1) of the ball striking device 650 is You can not actually launch the game ball along.

  The player holds the front handle of the rotary handle 506 and rotates it clockwise from the original position of zero degree (0 °), and the rotation angle θ of the front handle of the rotary handle 506 is 10 degrees (the release stop switch release position) When reaching up to 10 °, as described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 275 ° (275 °), and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 94.6% (9.46 kΩ) Is adjusted to a current of 1.04 A. At this time, a current of 1.04 A flows to the firing solenoid 654. At this firing strength, the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the ball striking launcher 650 is the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660 Of the space formed between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, even if it is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The player can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the preventing member 1116 (see FIG. 8), and rolls downward between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the reverse direction. A far space formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the inner rail 1112 1 (see FIG. 1) is received by the ball entry 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626, It is discharged to the lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7).

  The player holds the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 clockwise from 10 degrees (10 °) which is the release stop switch release position to turn the rotational angle θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 As described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 275 degrees (275 degrees) to 125 degrees (125 degrees) until reaching 100 degrees (100 degrees) which is the right-handed setting position. The output of the potentiometer 512 is adjusted from 94.6% to 41.1% (9.46 kΩ to 4.11 kΩ) so as to change linearly to a current of 1.04 A to 2.10 A ing. At this time, if the gaming ball fired from the striking device launch device 650 can not enter the gaming area 1100 beyond the backflow preventing member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 and the far space formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111. And is received by the ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626, and the lower tray 302 (see FIG. (See 7)). In other words, the player holds the front handle of the rotary handle 506 and rotates the front handle of the rotary handle 506 clockwise from 10 degrees (10 °) which is the release stop switch release position, and the gaming ball is at the end of the inner rail 1112 It is possible to realize "weak hit" that can be adjusted to a firing intensity that can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 by the resolution by the rotation operation of the rotary handle main body 506 .

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball fired from the hit ball launching device 650 can enter the gaming area 1100 beyond the backflow preventing member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the gaming ball fired toward the gaming area 1100. The player can strike the game ball in such a manner as to flow down the left side of the center character 2300. The above-mentioned "left-hand strike" can be realized by the turning operation of the rotary handle front 506.

  As described above, when the player holds the front handle of the rotary handle 506 and rotates it clockwise to reach the rotation angle θ of the front handle of the rotary handle 506 up to 100 ° (100 °) which is the right hitting setting position. , The rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 125 degrees (125 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 is 41.1% (4.11 kΩ) so that the current is adjusted to 2.10 A It has become. At this time, it is possible to strike the game ball so that the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 flows down the right side of the center character 2300 by the current of 2.10 A flowing to the discharge solenoid 654. The above-mentioned “right-handed” can be realized by the turning operation of the rotary handle front 506.

  In the case where the game board is enlarged by increasing, for example, the vertical dimension of the game board, the launch intensity of the game ball for "right-handing" must be increased according to the size of the game board. However, in the prior art, as the size of the game board is increased, the size of the launch solenoid of the ball striking device must also be increased, and the size of the game board is limited when a small launch solenoid is employed. In the prior art, when the game board is increased in size by adopting a small launch solenoid, it is necessary to flow a large current to the launch solenoid in order to increase the launch intensity of the gaming ball to "right-hand". In the case where a variable resistor in which the resistance value of "B curve" changes linearly is adopted, the game with respect to the rotation angle .theta. The ball's firing strength has to be set to be strong overall, and the game ball is vigorously fired toward the game area 1100 simply by rotating the front of the rotary handle 506 a few degrees clockwise from the original position. As a result, the rate of change of the firing intensity with respect to the rotation angle θ by the rotation operation of the front handle 506 is increased. That is, in the prior art, when the game board is increased in size by adopting a small launch solenoid, the launch intensity relative to the amount of rotational operation of the front handle of the rotary handle 506 is increased when the launch intensity of the gaming ball is increased to "right strike" However, even if it is attempted to adjust the game ball so as to pop out to a predetermined position of the game area 1100, it is difficult to make adjustment, and there is a drawback that the player is frustrated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum firing strength of the gaming ball to the minimum firing strength is measured over the entire range from zero ohm (0 Ω) which is the output minimum resistance of the potentiometer 512 to 10 k ohm (10 kΩ) which is the output maximum resistance. The detection axis of the potentiometer 512 is set so as to be 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °) instead of being adjusted to change linearly. Is set to be zero Ω (0 Ω) which is zero% when the rotation angle φ of the unit is 10 degrees (10 °), and the range of the effective rotation angle in which the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate Is set in the range of 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees). As a result, the player holds the front handle 506 and rotates the front handle 506 clockwise from 10 degrees (10 °), which is the release stop switch release position, to rotate the front handle 506. In the rotation range of 90 degrees (90 °) in which the angle θ extends to 100 ° (100 °) which is the right strike setting position, “weak strike” and “left strike” can be performed, and the player Holds the rotary handle body front 506 and performs a clockwise operation when the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle body front 506 reaches up to 100 ° (100 °) which is the right strike setting position, “right strike” is performed It can be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by employing the small-sized launch solenoid 654, the game board 4 can be increased in size, and the rotation operation of the front handle 506 in "weak hit" and "left hit" is performed. Since it is possible to increase the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the amount, it is easy to adjust so that the game ball pops out to a predetermined position of the game area 1100 formed in the large game board 4. Adjustment can be performed, and the player holds the front handle of the rotary handle 506 and rotates clockwise to turn the rotational angle θ of the front handle of the rotary handle 506 up to 100 ° (100 °) which is the right hitting setting position When you reach, you can definitely do a "right strike". That is, in the present embodiment, as the game board 4 is configured to be large in size, the vertical dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restricted due to the limitation of the vertical dimension, and along with the size reduction being made smaller, To increase the ratio of the change in the game ball's launch intensity to the rotation angle θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, even if the launch solenoid for driving the strike ball 656 that drives the game ball 656 is a small launch solenoid 654 Instead, the game ball can be finely adjusted to pop out to a predetermined position of the game area 1100. Therefore, by adopting a small-sized launch solenoid, it is possible to increase the size of the game board, and it is possible to suppress the frustration of the player due to the adjustment of the launch intensity of the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the entire range from zero ohm (0 Ω) which is the output minimum resistance of the potentiometer 512 to 10 k ohm (10 kΩ) which is the output maximum resistance is the maximum firing strength of the gaming ball It is not adjusted to change linearly up to the minimum emission intensity, but is set to be 10 kΩ which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °), When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 10 degrees (10 °), it is set to be zero Ω (0 Ω) which is zero percent, and the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate The range of the effective rotation angle is set in the range of 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees). And, from the maximum firing strength of the gaming ball to the minimum firing range, the range from 290 degrees (290 °) to 110 degrees (110 °) which is the range of the effective rotation angle where the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate It is adjusted to change the intensity linearly. When adjusting from the maximum firing intensity to the minimum firing intensity of the gaming ball along a plurality of straight lines (that is, along straight lines in the form of a line graph), it is necessary to provide a dedicated circuit around the potentiometer 512, Not only is the cost increased, but it is also necessary to secure a space for providing the dedicated circuit on the substrate, and the space for the substrate box needs to be enlarged by this space, and it is also necessary to study heat dissipation. Then, since the load on the dedicated circuit is caused by changing it on the broken line, the lifespan of the potentiometer 512 and the dedicated circuit are different, and the deterioration characteristics of the broken line characteristic by the potentiometer 512 and the dedicated circuit are examined in detail in circuit design and trial manufacture. It will take time to develop.

9-5. Drive timing of launch solenoid and ball feed solenoid]
Next, drive timings of the shooting solenoid 654 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 shown in FIG. 12 for sending gaming balls to the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the launch control unit 857 shown in FIG. 12 mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. The launch control circuit 857a performs control to adjust a drive current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on a resistance value which is an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and to output the same to the launch solenoid 654. At the same time, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Control is performed to send the received game ball to the ball hitting device 650 side. The emission control circuit 857a may be configured as an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or may be configured around a microprocessor including a ROM and a RAM.

  The emission control circuit 857a includes a clock signal oscillating unit (not shown) that generates a source oscillation of 4.096 megahertz (MHz), generates a clock signal from this source oscillation, and generates a reference time t0 (= 30.0195 ms (ms ) Is generated, and based on the reference time t0, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 are performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the emission control circuit 857a generates the clock signal CLK to generate the reference time t0, and the operations of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the emission solenoid 654 are managed based on the reference time t0. It is done. The operations of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the firing solenoid 654 are respectively started and completed by 20 times of the reference time t0. That is, the time corresponding to 20 times of the reference time t0 is one operation cycle of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the firing solenoid 654. By setting this one operation cycle to 20 times of the reference time t0, control can be performed to fire about 100 game balls in one minute.

  When one operation cycle is started, the ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is started to be output, and when the time for three times of the reference time t0 elapses, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started to be output. The ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output before the passage of time, and the ON signal to the ball sending solenoid 585 is started to start and the time corresponding to five times of the reference time t0 elapses. When the output of the ON signal to the launch solenoid 654 is started and the time for two times of the reference time t0 elapses, the ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is stopped and the OFF signal is output. Then, when the ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is stopped and the OFF signal is output to start the time of 15 times of the reference time t0, one operation cycle is started again.

  When the output of the ON signal to the launch solenoid 654 is started, as described above, the ON signal to the launch solenoid 654 is stopped and the output of the OFF signal is started before the reference time t0 elapses. . Specifically, when the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started and 23 ms elapses as the current supply time t1, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the output of the OFF signal is started .

  Thus, the time during which the ON signal to the emission solenoid 654 is output is shorter than 30.0195 ms, which is the reference time t0 of 23 ms, which is the current supply time t1. This is because, when the ON signal to the launch solenoid 654 is started to be output, the bat 槌 656 shown in FIG. 5 is also rotationally driven to strike and shoot the game ball. At this time, by returning the rotatively driven ball 656 to the original position to fire the next game ball, the game ball is hit by prolonging the time for which the ball 656 waits in the original position. It is possible to lengthen the time from when the hitting ball 656 vibrates to when it comes to a standstill state by momentum when it is fired and returned to the original position again. Thus, the player holds the rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body 506 so as to obtain a desired firing strength, and the upper starting opening 2101 etc. provided in the game area 1100 shown in FIG. In order to increase the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state that gives the player a profit by stably entering the game ball, the vibration of the bat 槌 656 in the case of maintaining the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506 Allows the player to prevent hitting in a state of being displaced from the core of the gaming ball, and enables the player to set the variation in the firing intensity of the gaming ball when striking and firing the next gaming ball. By stabilizing the shot strength, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the rate at which the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 or the like (ball entering rate). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frustrating feeling of the player due to the variation in the firing intensity of the game balls.

  In addition, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area, and a specific area in the special winning opening , Game zone 4 'of the specification that a big hit game is played for the player when the game ball passes V zone) is replaced with the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8, so-called feather mono game machine 1 In the case of being installed in the hole as', in the present embodiment, as described above, the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the amount of rotational operation of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 in "weak strike" and "left strike" can be increased. Since it is possible to finely adjust the launch intensity of the game ball, and to suppress variations in the launch intensity of the game ball, Spheres can be stably ball entrance.

9-6. Waste shot prevention circuit]
Next, the waste shot prevention circuit 857c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is used to detect whether the palm or finger of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. Is input through the handle relay terminal board 192, and a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is input through the payout control board 4110.

  A touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or finger touches the rotary handle main body 506 is a capacitance type switch and is an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned on when the palm or finger is in contact with the rotary handle front 506, and is turned off when the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle front 506.

  The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of blackout or momentary blackout of two types of voltages from + 12V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 851, although the detailed description will be described later. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice, and the payout blackout notice signal is input to the dead shot prevention circuit 857c as a blackout notice. The payout blackout notification signal output from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is LOW when no signs of blackout or instantaneous blackout of +12 V and +24 V are detected. On the other hand, when a sign of a power failure or a momentary stop of one or both voltages is detected in +12 V and +24 V, it is pulled up to +12 V side, and the logic becomes HI.

  Specifically, the transmission line for transmitting a detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether the palm or finger is touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor WR0 to be connected, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 via the resistor WR1. The base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor WR1, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor WR2 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR3 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. When the transistor WTR0 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 changes, and the signal is input as a connection signal to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors WR1 and WR2 and the transistor WTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516.

  Since the touch switch 516 is an open collector output by turning on the touch switch 516 when a palm or finger is touched on the front of the rotating handle main body 506, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is on the ground (GND) side And the logic of the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 is LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor WTR0 and switch The circuit will also be turned off.

  On the other hand, when the palm or finger does not touch the front handle 506, the touch switch 516 is turned off, and the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. Pulling up to +12 V by WR0 causes the logic of the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 to be HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor WR0 As a result, the transistor WTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

  As described above, when the palm or finger of the rotating handle main body 506 is touched, the transistor WTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off, whereby the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor WR3. On the other hand, the transistor WTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on when the palm or finger is not touched on the front handle 506, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the transmission line for transmitting the withdrawal blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor WR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage via the resistor WR5. The base terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor WR5, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor WR6 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR7 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage via the resistor WR8. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor WTR2 is electrically connected to the resistor WR8, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor WR9 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 described above. It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected resistor WR3. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the front stage is changed by turning on / off the transistor WTR1 of the front stage, and the transistor WTR2 of the rear stage is turned off / on by the logic of the signal. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the WTR 2 changes, and the signal is input as a connection signal to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors WR5 and WR6 and the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage, and the circuit constituted by the resistors WR8 and WR9 and the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage are turned ON / OFF by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e. Switch circuit.

  Since the logic of the payout blackout notification signal is LOW when the blackout monitoring circuit 4100 e does not detect a sign of blackout or instantaneous blackout of voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also ground. By being pulled down to the (GND) side, the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR2 of the subsequent stage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage. As the applied voltage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor WR7, the transistor WTR2 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on.

  On the other hand, when the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of blackout or momentary blackout of either or both of +12 V and +24 V, the payout blackout notification signal is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor WR4. Becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor WR4, whereby the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of WTR2, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is turned off and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. It will be.

  As described above, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e does not detect a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is turned OFF, the switch circuit of the previous stage is turned OFF, and the transistor WTR2 of the subsequent stage is ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side by turning on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage, while the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e selects either or both of +12 V and +24 V. When detecting a sign of a power failure or a momentary stop of the voltage of the latter, the transistor WTR1 of the previous stage is turned ON, the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, the transistor WTR2 of the second stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit of the second stage is turned OFF. Collector terminal of WTR2 Voltage applied is adapted to be pulled up by resistor WR3 to + 5V side.

  In the present embodiment, the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage are configured as a “wired OR circuit” electrically connected. Thus, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e does not detect a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of voltages of +12 V and +24 V, as described above, the transistor WTR1 of the former stage is turned OFF and the switch circuit of the former stage is turned OFF. The transistor WTR2 turns on, and the switch circuit on the subsequent stage also turns on, as the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 on the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic is always LOW. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of WTR0 is applied to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the firing control circuit 857a. That is, when the front handle 506 is touched with a palm or finger, the transistor WTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor WR3. While the connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the firing control circuit 857a, the transistor WTR0 is turned ON when the palm or finger is not touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and the switch circuit is also As the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by turning on and the logic becomes LOW, the connection signal that is LOW is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the firing control circuit 857a. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of blackout or momentary blackout of either or both of +12 V and +24 V, as described above, the transistor WTR1 of the former stage is turned on, and the switch circuit of the former stage is also Since the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned OFF and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned OFF at the same time as the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor WR3, the logic is always HI. Causes the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 to be pulled down to the ground (GND) side, but regardless of whether it is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor WR3, the connection signal with logic always HI is fired It is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the control circuit 857a. It has become.

  As described above, the launch control circuit 857a steps down +37 V supplied from the power generation circuit 855d in the DC / DC converter 857aa shown in FIG. 12 of the launch control circuit 857a to generate a solenoid drive DC power supply (+35 V). The electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged by applying the solenoid drive DC power supply (+35 V) to the electrolytic capacitor 857b. A combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 857aa and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows into the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. It has become.

  The firing control circuit 857a detects that the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal is LOW when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12 V and +24 V. In other words, when the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect the signs of blackouts or momentary blackouts of +12 V and +24 V, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not touched with a palm or a finger, When it is determined that there is, in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, operation from the potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front handle 506. A driving mechanism for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on a signal This is when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e does not detect a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V while forcibly stopping the control of adjusting the merging current and outputting to the firing solenoid 654. Also, when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is touched with a palm or finger, it is determined that the launch is permitted, and the game ball is played according to the rotational position of the front main handle 506 in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. Based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the launch strength (launch strength) toward the area 1100, the drive current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 is adjusted to the merging current And performs control to output to the firing solenoid 654.

  On the other hand, emission control circuit 857a receives an input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal when blackout monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of blackout or instantaneous blackout of either or both of +12 V and +24 V. When the logic of the connection signal to be output is always HI, it is determined that the firing is stopped regardless of whether a palm or finger is touched on the front of the rotating handle main body 506, and the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab The game ball is directed to the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front handle 506. Control that adjusts the merging current and outputs it to the firing solenoid 654. Forced to stop. As a result, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged in the event of a power failure or momentary interruption and flows to the discharge solenoid drive circuit 857ab, thereby preventing the flow to the discharge solenoid 654 as a drive current. It is possible to prevent the launch of waste shots.

  The touch switch 516 (capacitance type switch) is for detecting a change in capacitance caused by touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506 with a palm or finger. The game is held by fixing the rotation position of the game with paper, coins, etc., leaving the seat and leaving it as it is, and when the business hours of the hall are over, the store clerk etc. Because the touch switch 516 may be turned on even though the palm or finger is not touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506 due to the voltage becoming unstable due to the power interruption, the electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged. The charge is discharged and flows as a drive current to the firing solenoid 654 to cause the game ball to be fired toward the game area 1100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the firing control circuit 857a detects that the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of one or both of +12 V and +24 V. When the logic of the connection signal input to the logic connection signal input terminal is always HI, it is determined that the firing is stopped regardless of whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and firing is performed. In solenoid drive circuit 857ab, the game ball is controlled based on the operation signal from potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the game ball toward game area 1100 according to the rotational position of rotary handle main body 506. Drive current for launching (playing) toward the game area 1100, adjusting the merging current and firing solenoid It is adapted to forcibly stop the control output to 54. As a result, the player fixes the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 with paper or coin, plays a game, leaves the seat and is left as it is, and the store clerk or the like in the hall powers the pachinko gaming machine 1 Even when the touch switch 516 is turned on even though the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle main body 506 at the time of shutting off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b in the blackout or momentary stoppage is By preventing discharge and flow to the discharge solenoid drive circuit 857ab as a drive current to the flow to the discharge solenoid 654, it is possible to prevent the firing of a useless shot of the gaming ball at the time of power shutoff.

  In addition, before the player starts playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, for the time being, the player operates the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360 shown in FIG. 7 to operate the game ball on the upper plate 301 shown in FIG. Fill up with a break (toilet and food and drink) and leave the seat for rest (toilet and food and drink), or fill the upper plate 301 with gaming balls acquired with another pachinko gaming machine and leave the seat for a break (toilet and food and drink) May. At this time, the player who was playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 in front of the player is not aware that the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is fixed by paper or coin, and for rest as it is If you happen to have a power failure or momentary power interruption while leaving your seat, the palm or finger does not touch the front of the rotating handle body 506 because the voltage becomes unstable due to the power interruption such as a power failure or momentary power interruption Since the touch switch 516 may be turned on, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows as a drive current to the emission solenoid 654 to cause the game ball to be emitted toward the game area 1100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in such a case, as described above, the emission control circuit 857a is a sign of a blackout or an instantaneous blackout of one or both of the + 12V and + 24V of the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e. When the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal becomes HI at the time of detection, regardless of whether the palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506, the firing is stopped. When it is determined that there is, in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, operation from the potentiometer 512 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front handle 506. The drive current for launching (playing) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the signal is Adjusted to adapted to forcibly stop the control output to the firing solenoid 654. Thus, before the player starts playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, for the time being, the player operates the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360 to fill the upper plate 301 with the gaming balls and leaves the seat for a break. Or when filling up the game balls obtained with other pachinko machines with the game balls and leaving the seat for a break, the player was playing a game with pachinko machine 1 in front of the player The player does not notice that the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is fixed by paper or coin, and the touch switch 516 is turned on even though the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not touched with a palm or a finger. As a drive current, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged at the time of a power failure or momentary interruption and flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. By preventing the flow to the shooting solenoid 654, it is possible to prevent the firing of the game ball in the event of a power failure or a momentary stop, so that the player can himself in front of the rotating handle main body while taking a break. Even if the user does not operate 506, the disadvantage that the gaming ball is fired can be prevented.

  By the way, the transmission line for transmitting the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 to detect whether the rotating handle body front 506 is touched by the palm or finger is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line described above. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor WR0 to be connected, it is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 via the resistor WR10. The base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the resistor WR10, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor WR11 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR3 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 4110 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 4110 through the wiring (harness), the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 12 in the payout control substrate 4110. , And one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Ru.

  When the transistor WTR3 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 changes, and the signal is input to the payout control board 4110 as a payout connection signal via the wiring (harness).

  The circuit composed of the resistors WR10 and WR11 and the transistor WTR3 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516.

  As described above, when the palm or finger of the rotating handle main body 506 is touched, the touch switch 516 is turned on, and the touch switch 516 is an open collector output, so the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded. When pulled down to the (GND) side, the logic of the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness) The dispensing contact signal that has become HI is input to the dispensing control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not in contact with the front handle 506, as described above, the touch switch 516 is turned off, and the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. Is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor WR0 of the wasted shot prevention circuit 857c, the logic of the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is also Pulling up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor WR0 turns on the transistor WTR3 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is the payout control substrate 4110. Is input to

[10. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 24 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 25 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 17 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 4100, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes the main control MPU 4100a, the main control input circuit 4100b, the main control output circuit 4100c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and the main control board 4100 shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 23, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

10-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 23, the main control filter circuit 4100 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its noise component removed from its third terminal +5 V is output. The +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is first removed. Are smoothed out.

  The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V created by the power generation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 17 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and +5 V is created. When the circuit 4100 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 4100 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

10-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 23, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 is for resetting the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The main control output circuit 4100 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

10-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 23, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal respectively.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside It is in the state.

10-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100 b is the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110 and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control substrate 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described.

[10-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control board 4100 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 4100a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 4110 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the main control The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 from the payout control board 4110, while when the operation switch 860a is operated, the logic from the payout control board 4110 is input. An operation signal with “HI” is input from the payout control board 4110 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  The transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control substrate 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR4 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 860a is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Be done. When the logic of the operation signal from operation switch 860a input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 4100a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. Do.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Be done. When the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input through the payout control board 4110. That is, between the substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the delivery control substrate 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates, the voltage is higher than +5 V which is the control reference voltage. The voltage of +12 V is used to increase the signal reliability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are directly input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up to +5 V by pull-up resistance. On the other hand, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

10-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors + 12V and + 24V blackouts or indications of a blackout, and detects a blackout or blackout as a blackout notice as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 4100a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120 a of 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then, monitoring of a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or a momentary power failure, and output of a power failure notification signal will be described.

[10-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 24, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used. , And used to compare the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is grounded. The +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. The third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied, has one end connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24 V power supply line and one end as shown in FIG. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 21 and MR 22, and the capacitor MC 23 removes the ripple and smoothes it. . The values of the resistances MR21 and MR22 become a power failure detection voltage V1 pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) which is set in advance when the +24 V fails or momentarily stops, and the voltage starts dropping from +24 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1 pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-3. Monitoring of +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout]
As described above, the monitoring of the +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 24, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitor voltage V 2 of +12 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR 24 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is an open-collector output, and is electrically connected to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 connected at one end and electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24 connected to ground. It is electrically connected to the terminal PR. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the +12 V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-4. Output of blackout notice signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value While outputting (logic) from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from a negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. When the signal whose logic has become HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic 1) Maintain the output state from the Q terminal).

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is grounded at the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, as described above Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC22, which is grounded, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Ripple is removed by capacitor MC22 and +5 V is smoothed, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is the external It is in an unconnected state.

  In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process to be described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal as its logic becomes LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The D type flip flop MIC22 is configured to release the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal as the preset terminal is inverted to output the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 4100a through main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure advance notification signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function, and the signal outputted from the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of D type flip flop MIC22 is reset The non-function main control output circuit 4100cb outputs it as a payout blackout notice signal to the payout control board 4110, and outputs it as a peripheral blackout notice signal to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control input circuit 4100b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line at one end and also non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a It is input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. Thus, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a It is input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 4110 as a payout blackout notification signal is open. The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 4110 through the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 12 in the payout control substrate 4110. In circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit formed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is a switch circuit of the former stage, and the circuit formed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the latter stage is a switch circuit of the latter stage. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage because its logic becomes LOW because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic thereof becomes HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is lowered to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 24, the main control output circuit 4100 cb having no reset function for outputting a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 4150 in peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. And one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 because its logic is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 4140.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 4100b which transmits the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The reset control-free main control output circuit 4100cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure notice signal Main There are two transistors in the control output circuit 4100cb at the former and latter stages, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral blackout notice input to the peripheral control board 4140 It is a logic obtained by inverting the logic of the signal, and is different from the logic of the power failure notification signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notification signal.

  The collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and main control MPU 4100a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the second embodiment via the wiring (harness). In the dispensing control input circuit 4120b of the dispensing control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU 4100a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Since it is mounted on the 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to make a blackout notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the blackout notice signal using +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates between the substrates with the substrate 4110 and between the substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140, the main control MPU 4100a, Payout control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

10-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a do not have the reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal and transmit the main data to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal. The circuit 4100cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100cb with no reset function, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout that indicates the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input through the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the upper start opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11 are each input through the main control input circuit 4100b. Input, etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function The main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 4110, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 through the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Output to the equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various indicator from resetting function main control output circuit 4100Ca.

10-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 through the payout control board 4110, and the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this +12 V. ing. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 4140, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

  The +12 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to main control substrate 4100 via discharge control substrate 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. The voltage can be continuously applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 from the main control substrate 4100 as + 12V.

  As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 4100a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the electrostatic capacity: 470 μF) shown in FIG. The main charge serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a at least serial-controls the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in its transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 4100 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 4100 aea.

  The main cycle serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is, as described above, to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control substrate 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140. Because the main control MPU 4100a is incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a, the serial management unit 4100 aec transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100 aa in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb to the transmission shift register 41 aea for transmission When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 at +12 V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 4100 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100 a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of 10 packets at maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal outputting the main cycle serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and the resistor MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit formed of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no current flows in the forward direction to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. . As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

  The +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as the +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is applied to the main control MPU 4100a when +5 V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power or instantaneous interruption occurs The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 4100 ae can be transmitted completely, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off The peripheral control board 4140 is reliably received without being lost or being dropped.

  When the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of main control MPU 4100a to peripheral control substrate 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. Logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned ON to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main voltage serial data transmission signal whose voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to the occurrence of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, and even if a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5 V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100 cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a voltage for communication applied from the +12 V power supply line via the diode MD 50 drops due to a power failure or a momentary interruption due to the parallel connection of the terminal and the circuit, the second auxiliary power supply By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disconnection of the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and to prevent the dropout, so the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dropout of the command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 4100 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100 a are all constituted of the resistance MR50, the resistances MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as main transmission serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 4100cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. And 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are functioned as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 4100 cb, the peripheral control board 4140 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. Can be received reliably.

[11. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 27 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 32 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[11. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 26, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 17 and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor PC0 removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 first to remove ripple (AC component folded to voltage) and smoothes the voltage. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, and the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, which will be described later. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (a discharge control built-in RAM) built in the discharge control MPU 4120a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and via the resistor PR0, the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 17 is not supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is paid off. Because it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as a current, the diode PD0 blocks the current to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB.

11-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 26 in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[11-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 26, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 is for resetting the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC5, and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Because the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function are operated when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold. A reset is applied to the attached payout control output circuit 4120 ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

11-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 26, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC8 at one end, and +5 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples further. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[11-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the door frame open switch 618, the main frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 12 and the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input through the handle relay terminal board 192 shown in FIG. 12 and the power supply substrate 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, The circuit from which the touch-off signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 shown is inputted through the power supply substrate 851, the emission control circuit 857a of the emission control unit 857 provided on the power supply substrate 851 to the handle device 500 shown in FIG. The rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body is the right-handed setting position shown in FIG. ) Is a circuit that payout right-handed signal is output to reach is input to. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, and subsequently, the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the circuit to which the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank switch is input, the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing contact signal from the touch switch is input, and the dispensing right from the emission control circuit of the power supply board A circuit to which a signal is input will be described. In addition, since various detection switches such as the full tank switch 550 and the out-of-ball switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal of is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

[11-2-3 (a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. The switch 5 is turned off (disconnected) in a state where the body frame 3 is closed. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, The contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, a voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame open signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Ru. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, whereby the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a. An outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and having logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal having logic HI is input to the main control board 4100, In the state where the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a An outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[11-2-3 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The body frame open switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. When 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded. The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC21 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. As the transistor PTR23 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR32 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is shown in FIG. 11 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 through a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, or when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, The contact constituting the main body frame open switch 619 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame open switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR 29 and PR 30 and the transistor PTR 23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR 31 and PR 32 and the transistor PTR 24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619.

  When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board It is input to 4100.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to The outer end frame door open information output signal with the LOW being input is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with the logic set to LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2 on the basis of the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player does not occur during normal game that the main body frame 3 is open is generated, and the external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. This outer end is designed to be input The door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, Or although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 3 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, there is a state where the player that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 is open does not occur during the normal game. It can be determined that it is occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even in the state of conduction, the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3, and the body frame open switch 619 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on (conduction), the body frame 3 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the door frame open switch 618 and the main body frame open switch 619 as a normally closed switch, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are replaced with a normally closed switch (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 'and body frame opening switch 619') The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . When the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is broken for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is kept open from the main body frame 3, and the main body for some reason Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at the time of disconnection. The outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[11-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end and It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 through the PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input as the payout failure notification signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 851, and detects no signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts, and does not have a reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100 cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 4110, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the detection failure voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage + 12V is larger than the detection failure voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a blackout or a momentary loss of voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At the same time, since the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the payout control substrate 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, that is, +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the payout control board 4110, and is thus applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA 1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 4100a On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout notification signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notification signal input to the main control MPU 4100a are the same logic.

[11-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank switch is input]
A detection signal from the full switch 550 provided in the fal cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It has been input. The output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control substrate 4110 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the full switch 3-terminal filter PIC50. The full switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected through the resistor PR44b to the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 And the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thus, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full switch three-terminal filter PIC 50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND) in addition to the electrical connection to the resistor PR45, and one end is connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and also a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40 B).) Payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. As the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as the full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is dispensed via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply substrate 851. When the signal which is pulled up to +12 V by pull-up resistance 44a and becomes HI in control board 4110 is inputted to payout control board 4110, when the storage space is full with the stored gaming balls, The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control substrate 4110 through the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply substrate 851, and the signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 4110.

  When the storage space is not full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled at the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. The signal that is pulled up to +12 V by the up resistor 44 a and whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, so that the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is the payout control board 4110 through the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. In the above, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, so that the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 through the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 However, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is to be directly input to each switch circuit without an intervening. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the full ball switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3. Compared to etc., the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 is for detecting whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 540 is full with stored gaming balls, and the payout control MPU 4120 a is for using the full tank switch 550. Based on the detection signal of, when it is judged that the gaming space in which the storage space is full is full, the control for forcibly stopping the drive control of the payout motor 744 and stopping the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is performed. It is supposed to be done. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the storage space is neither full nor full. There is a case that the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and the drive control of the payout motor 744 is performed regardless of whether the storage space is full with the stored game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 744 is The load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 744 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat, causing a failure, or transmitting the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 744 to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is adopted such that the noise component is removed from the detection signal from the full switch 550 in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full switch first. .

[11-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose ground is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR56 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to main control substrate 4100 through a wiring (harness), one end of main control input circuit 4100 b of main control substrate 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. As the transistor PTR 44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100 a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit formed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 860a repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the later stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time to time, and an error release after the power is turned on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from the time of power on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor of the previous stage The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal with the logic HI which is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR 44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 4100. It is input. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as described above, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, this logic is LOW as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 at the rear stage. Is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 23 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it instructs to clear the RAM stored in the main control internal RAM.

[11-2-3 (f). Circuit to which the dispensing contact signal from the touch switch is input]
The detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 is input to the payout control substrate 4110 via the power supply substrate 851, as shown in FIG. The output terminal of the touch switch 516 is a circuit configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57a to be connected and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 via the resistor PR57b. The base terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the resistor PR57b, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR57c which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR45 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57d whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 D)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. As the transistor PTR 45 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 45 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA 6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a as a payout connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR57b and PR57c and the transistor PTR45 is turned ON / OFF by a payout contact signal that a detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 is input through the power supply substrate 851. It is a switch circuit.

  As described above, the touch switch 516 is a capacitance type switch that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and is an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned on when the palm or finger is in contact with the rotary handle front 506, and is turned off when the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle front 506. As described above, when the palm or finger of the rotating handle main body 506 is touched, the touch switch 516 is turned on, and the touch switch 516 is an open collector output, so the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded. Pulled down to (GND) side, the logic of the detection signal (touch signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is also pulled down to ground (GND) Thus, the transistor WTR3 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is connected to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor PR57a in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness). As described above, the touch switch 516 is turned OFF as described above when the payout contact signal whose logic has become HI by being pulled up is input to the payout control substrate 4110 and the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle front 506. As a result, since the touch switch 516 is an open collector output, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor WR0 of the waste shot prevention circuit 857c, and thus the detection signal from the touch switch 516 The logic of (contact signal 1) becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is also pulled up to +12 V by pull-up resistor WR0, so that transistor WTR3 is turned on and the collector of transistor WTR3 Applied to terminal Payout contact signal logic becomes LOW by being pulled to ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via a voltage wiring (harness) that is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When a palm or finger is touched on the front handle 506 of the rotating handle, a payout contact signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 by the payout connection signal. As the voltage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR57a, the transistor PTR45 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout contact signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 45 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA 6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a. When the logic of the payout contact signal input to input terminal PA6 is LOW, payout control MPU 4120a determines (discriminates) that the palm or finger is touching front side of rotary handle main body 506, and main control board 4100 indicates that. Tell. The main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 11 that the palm or finger is touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506.

  On the other hand, when the rotary handle body front 506 is not touched with a palm or finger, a payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is inputted to the payout control board 4110, and this is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 by this payout connection signal. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 45 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 45 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR 57 d. As a result, the payout contact signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the logic of the payout contact signal input to input terminal PA6 is HI, payout control MPU 4120a determines (discriminates) that the palm or finger is not touched on rotary handle main body 506, and main control board 4100 indicates that. Tell. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the palm or finger is not touching the front of the rotary handle main body 506.

[11-2-3 (g). Circuit to which the discharge right-handed signal from the launch control circuit of the power supply board is input]
The discharge right-handed signal from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 12 is input from the emission control circuit 857a provided on the power supply substrate 851 to the payout control substrate 4110 via the right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 851. . The output terminal of the right-handed signal output circuit is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and as shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e electrically connected thereto, and are also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 via the resistor PR57f. The base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the resistor PR57f, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR57g which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR46 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57h whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 E)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. As the transistor PTR 46 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 46 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout right-on signal.

  The circuit constituted of the resistors PR57f and PR57g and the transistor PTR46 is turned on / off by the discharge right-turning signal outputted from the firing control circuit 857a provided on the power supply substrate 851 through the right-handed signal output circuit not shown. It is a switch circuit which turns off.

  In the firing control circuit 857a, as described above, based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 provided in the steering wheel device 500 shown in FIG. 7, the rotational position .theta. )) If it is determined (discriminated) that the turning operation has been performed above, a right-handed signal notifying that the game is being played by right-handed is output to the payout control board 4110 as a payout right-handed signal. This output is output via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) and is an open collector output. When the firing control circuit 857a determines (discriminates) that the rotational position θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated at the right-handed setting position (100 degrees (100 °)) or more, as described above, the right is not shown The right-hand-out signal with logic LOW is input to the payout control board 4110 by pulling down the collector terminals of the transistors of the striking signal output circuit to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). On the other hand, when the firing control circuit 857a determines (discriminates) that the rotational position θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not turned for more than the right hitting setting position (100 degrees (100 °)) The collector terminals of the transistors of the circuit are connected via a wiring (harness) to the discharge control unit 4120 of the discharge control board 4110. In the output control input circuit 4120b, the discharge right output signal whose logic is HI by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and pulled up to the +12 V side. Are input to the payout control board 4110.

  When it is determined (discriminated) by the firing control circuit 857a that the rotational position θ of the front handle of the rotating handle main body 506 is rotated at least to the right setting position (100 ° (100 °)), the payout is LOW Since the right-handed signal is input to the payout control substrate 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the right-handed out signal, and the transistor PTR46 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR 57 h. As a result, a payout right-handed signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the logic of the payout right strike signal input to the input terminal PA7 is HI, the payout control MPU 4120a determines (determines) that the game is being played by the right strike, and informs the main control board 4100 of that. Note that the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that a game with a right-handed game is being performed.

  On the other hand, the logic becomes HI when it is determined (discriminated) by the firing control circuit 857a that the rotational position θ of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 has not been rotated by the right hitting set position (100 degrees (100 °)) or more. Since the discharge right-handed signal is input to the discharge control substrate 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR57e by the discharge right-handed signal, and the transistor PTR46 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 46 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout right-handed signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 46 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA 7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a. When the logic of the payout rightward signal input to the input terminal PA7 is LOW, the payout control MPU 4120a determines (determines) that no right-handed game is being played (that is, a left-handed game is being played), The fact is transmitted to the main control board 4100. Note that the main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the game is not being played by right-handing (that is, the game is being played by left-handing).

[11-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the payout motor drive circuit 4120 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and the +5 V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and +5 V are applied respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da is connected to the ground (GND) It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da. The voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control with payout control output circuit 4120ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 4120 da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 744. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 4120 da. While supplying to a terminal and a 10th terminal, it supplies to the payout motor 744.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120 a to the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60 It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing in each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744 to rotate the dispensing motor 744. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[11-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 13 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the game ball request signal BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and the ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. Through terminal plate 869, an EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a dispensing operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible And output. As shown in FIG. 31, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer FIG. 26 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80 A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR76 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 851 through a wiring (harness), one end of power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 851 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thereby, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and switching circuit It will turn on. As a result, the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is pulled down to the power supply substrate 851 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 851 via the wiring (harness). Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 851 Be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80 B) without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 4120a is output to the dispensing control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the resetting function. 4120 cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 via the resistor PR 81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal via the reset function-free output control circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI The EXS is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb It is the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the output control terminal without the reset function 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120 a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120 cb It is the same logic.

[11-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. A reset function-free delivery control output circuit 4120 cb transmits a payment serial data transmission signal to the main control board 4100.

  The RWMCLR signal, the payout blackout notification signal, the door open signal, the full signal, the various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to the input terminals of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition to the signal 1 etc.) being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. shown in FIG. 12 are respectively input through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the non-refundable payout control output circuit 4120cb, and the EXS signal from the non-refundable payout control output circuit 4120cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 4120ca to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the payout motor 744 through the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition to the above, for example, a payer ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function and paid out from the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, and the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 12 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function Are output to the error LED indicator 860b or the like.

11-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[11-3-1. Various input and output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the payout control board 4110 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100 b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has 15 round big hit information output signals, 2 round big hit information output signals, etc. Big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time information output signal in the short time, starting opening winning information output signal etc A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 4120 b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control substrate 4110.

[11-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, an award ball number information output signal indicating the number of gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. In addition to the big hit information output signal such as 15 round big hit information output signal and 2 round big hit information output signal from the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output A game information signal such as a signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round big hit information output signal or the 2 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big hit information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of times the round has become 2 rounds (2 round big hit) The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when 15 rounds have occurred (the number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum of the numbers is the number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hole computer can not grasp the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit and the number of occurrences of the 15 land big hit from the summed number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large However, it can not be grasped whether it is 2 round big hit or 15 round big hit. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, among the players, whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state etc. displayed on this data counter. Some people choose.

  However, since the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit, even if the player starts the game, only the 2 round big hit occurs. There are times when the 15 round big hit does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player's irritability may be more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. It has become possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit. Therefore, the hole computer can grasp whether the number of big hits that actually occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter is 15 Since the number of round big hit occurrences and the number of two round big hit occurrences can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming state occurrences, the player's cunning feeling is more than necessary Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer in the period from the generation to the end. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs There is also a method of outputting an output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[12. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 34 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 34 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has detection signals from various winning switches such as general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, upper starting opening switch 3022, lower starting opening switch 2109, and count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When it is input, based on these detection signals, it transmits to the payout control board a winning ball command for paying out a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls as a winning ball. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the upper tray 301 or the storage tray, which is a storage tray, drives the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) by communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As shown in FIG. 33A, when the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out game balls as rental balls (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, and in the command 10H, one prize ball is In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated. In the command 1EH, fifteen prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to payout the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a storage ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as a storage dish) are installed adjacent to a game hall When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated in the command 20H, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,. In 2EH, 15 winning balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to payout the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is specified in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  Various commands, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, jackpot related, power on, flat figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 34, of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. It is comprised from a command named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification regarding the upper special symbol display 1185. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and the like The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

12-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 34, of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 is composed of commands named special image 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special image 2 tuning effect end. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 34, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the big winning opening 1 is open of the 1st to 16th rounds (shown in FIG. During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103, the large winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the opening of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100 During the closing between 2103 rounds or the start of closing), the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11, It is to convey the ball number of the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103, and the big hit ending command is the big hit endin Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (when the small winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened or opened at the small hit) The small hit count display command is a small hit middle large winning opening winning combination (in the case of small hit, when the game ball entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large for attacker unit 2100 Sent to the opening of the Nth round of the winning opening 2103), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent to the closing of the special winning opening 1 (closing start of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), the big winning The mouth 1 count display command is when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the gaming ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is a count switch Sent when the jackpot is detected by the 2110) and the jackpot ending command is Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is sent at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent at the small hit open (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), small The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entering the large opening 2103 in the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), the small hitting ending command is Sent at the start of small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

12-4-4. Power on]
The division of power on includes various commands named power on as shown in FIG. In this power on command, “D * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power on command instructs start of RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, start of effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power on shown in FIG. To direct).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at the time other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The regular-tune-related effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 34, the normal symbol display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common figure tuning production start, common design designation, common figure tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1189. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related to the pair relates to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Opening, Common Power Release Display, and Ending, Common Drawing. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 State or when it is expanded), and the ending command per common figure indicates the start of ending per common figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (When expanding in the left and right direction), the ending command per common drawing is transmitted at the beginning of the ending per common drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) When the count switch 2110 detects the start of notification of a winning abnormality, the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a route between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it instructs the start of connection abnormality notification. For example, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the main control board 4100, the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. This command instructs the start of the open circuit / short circuit error display when the open circuit / short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door frame 5 sends a door opening command to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 which is input via the payout control substrate 4110 shown in FIG. When it is in the open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door close command is such that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. When it is in the second state, the door open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the large winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormality display command is paid out from the main control board 4100 Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. The magnetic detection switch error display command is sent when an abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the door open command is detected when the door is open (a door frame is opened). The door frame 5 is opened relative to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the switch 618. Is sent to the door closing command, the door closing command is in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 when the door closing is detected When sent). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the status display section is composed of commands with the names frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 35, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the format of the command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and frame status 2 commands are at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 35, the test-related section is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance by the contents of specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

12-2-10. Other]
The other divisions, as shown in FIG. 35, are starting opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening starting winning effect start, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, The start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109 is instructed respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is from the variation shortening operation state The state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed, the high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is a special symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 still displays the variation of the special symbol The special symbol 2 memory command is to convey the number of balls not being used (the number of reserved balls), and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 suspension (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8) The special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 is used to convey the number of balls (number of reservations) not yet used for the variable display of special symbols, and the ordinary symbol memory command is ordinary symbol 1 with 0 to 4 pieces (The game ball passes through the gate 2350 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 transmits the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol) , Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is read based on the special symbol 1 hold before special symbol 1 hold is used to display special symbols at the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 special The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is to instruct the advance notice of the display result by the pattern display 1185, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is a special symbol 2 special feature in the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 Before being used for the variable display of, it instructs the start of the pre-reading effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 suspension.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning time (when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening switch The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109) The variation reduction operation end specification command transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in 5 to notify of that with voice is at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined which has settled the fluctuation reduction of the specified number of times. Is sent, and the high probability end specification command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop period) after the fluctuation is determined which has digested the high probability frequency in the case of “high probability N times”. , Special symbol 1 memory command, when special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change (The game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 and it is still used for the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol indicator 1185 on the function display board 1191 In the state where there is a number of reservations not being made, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 further and the number of reservations increases, or from the number of reservations, it is used for variation display of special symbols in the special symbol display 1185 The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reservations is reduced, and the special symbol 2 operation command is changed when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the special symbol below the function display board 1191 When the number of game balls enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the number of reservations increases further while there is a number of reservations not yet used for the variable display of special symbols on the display 1186, or the number of reservations below the special symbol table It is transmitted when the number of reservations is reduced by using the special symbol in the variable display of the container 1186), and the normal symbol memory command is normal symbol 1 operation when the number of balls is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2350) When the number of game balls passes through the gate 2350 and the number of reservations increases while the number of reservations is not yet used for variation display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191, Special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increases (starting on the special symbol 1 operation) When the game ball enters the mouth 2101 and the number of reservations increases, it is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is when the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls increase (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102) Sent when the number of reservations increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the starting opening winning command is from the lower starting opening switch 2109. (When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly with voice Although transmitted to notify the effect, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specification of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to audio notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, monitoring for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity It is a thing of the specification that it uses also for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 simply by the peripheral control board 4140 simply receiving the starting opening prize command. There is also a thing of the specification which does not alert | report by audio | voice from 130.

12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation and frame state 2, and the frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command, out of ball, full tank, out of 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR unconnected are prepared, and in the case of ball out, bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit) is prepared. The value 1 is set, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in more than 50 stocks, and the value is set to bit 3 (B3) if connection is abnormal 1 is set, and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

  For the error cancellation navi command, a ball is found, and a counting switch error and retry error are prepared. If the ball is set to bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set, if it is a counting switch error, value is set to bit 3 (B3) 1 is set, and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 12 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame status 2 command, the ball is being extracted, the steering wheel is being operated and the right hitting is prepared, the bit 0 (B0) is set to the value 1 during the ball extraction, and the bit 1 (B1) is set during the steering operation. The value 1 is set and bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1 while hitting right. In bit 3 (B3) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B3 is set to 0, B4 to 0, B5 to 1, B6 to 1, and B7 to 0. Note that "in handle operation" means that the palm or finger is touched on the rotating handle main body 506 shown in FIG. 7, and "in the right" is playing a game by the right It conveys the effect. In other words, when "handle operation" is not included in the frame status 2 command, the rotary handle body front 506 is notified that the palm or finger is not touched, and "right strike" is included in the frame status 2 command. If not, it tells the player not to play the game to the right (that is, play the game by the left strike).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. For example, in the frame state 2 command, when the player is seated on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 with a palm or a finger, the rotary front main body 506 starts to rotate If the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506 has not reached the above-mentioned right-handed setting position (that is, the stage at which the left-handed game has started to be played), the B1 is transmitted to convey the state of operating the steering wheel. While the value 1 is set, the value 0 is set to B2 and transmitted to inform the player that the state of "right hitting" is not in progress (that is, the state of playing a game by left hitting), while the player In order to start the game by right-handing from the state where the player is playing a game by left-handling, the user operates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to turn the front of the rotary handle When the rotational position of 06 has reached the above-mentioned right-handed setting position, B1 is set to the value 1 to convey the state of "operating the steering wheel" and B2 for conveying the state of "right-handed driving" Is set to 1 and sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[13. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 37, and FIG. 39 is an example of the main control timer interrupt process Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

13-1. Various random numbers]
As a random number used for game control, a jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and a jackpot determination initial value determination for use in determining an initial value of the jackpot determination random number For the random number, the random number for reach judgment to be used to decide whether to generate reach (reach out) when not generating the big hit gaming state, and the special symbol display 1185 and lower special shown in FIG. 11 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display 1186, and a special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol display 1186 when generating a big hit gaming state A jackpot symbol random number for use in determining the jackpot symbol to be displayed derivedly and a jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number The random number for initial value determination, the small random number for small hit symbol to be used for the determination of the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit gaming state, this small A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol for use in determining an initial value of a random number for a winning symbol is prepared. Also, in addition to these random numbers, for determining the initial value per random symbol per judgment used to determine whether or not to move the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. A random number for determining an initial value for determination of a normal symbol for use, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern, etc. for use in determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range (from the minimum value to the maximum value from 32767 in this embodiment) ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by being incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing described later is performed. The counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number determination for big hit determination. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The jackpot determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. Further, the random number for determining the normal symbol per pattern, and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol are the same as the updating method of the random number for determining the big hit as described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for the big hit determination. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process, but when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the power-off process (power-off) The random number for determining the jackpot determining initial value is a counter that the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 11 takes out the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the jackpot judging random number based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, for the jackpot determination initial value determination random number, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value derivation process. Thus, the value set for the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a uses the ID of the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, with the first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if an external device is stored if the code is stored. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value, and the two-step security measure by preventing it from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the big hit judgment. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 4 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that acquires fraudulently and updates the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value, the unique code for identifying the individual is given to the ID code. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in another game board 4 ′. That is, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value is completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in other game boards 4 ', that is, other pachinko gaming machines 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. A big hit occurs even if you aim for the starting winning combination that the game ball is made to enter the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8 at every predetermined interval. It is not possible to generate a gaming state.

13-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When the initial value update type counter clears the whole area of the main control internal RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and based on the taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value in the first cycle, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judgment random number, it draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number as a jackpot judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability variation judgment table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured to update a predetermined fixed numerical value range ranging from the value 0 to the value 32767 as the minimum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range from the middle value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

  Here, as a range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 10 to the value 209 is set in the low probability, and the value 10 to the value 339 is set in the high probability. The range of values (big hit judgment range) is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the middle value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. . In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the first value 10 in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely low in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The former range is the latter range compared to the range following the last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball starts up by irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method. If cheating is done as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start mouth 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes any value within the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is an intermediate value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value. When the value is set in the range close to the maximum value side, the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) In comparison with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely high in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) Comparing the range over to the range from the first value (the value 32668 for the low probability, the value 31768 for the high probability) to the maximum (the value 32767), the former range is more comparable to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit determination. It counts up and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , It will count up toward the maximum value from the value obtained by lottery.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is the median value (value 16384) from the minimum value to the maximum value to the maximum value side If the value is set in a range close to 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is low (low The period over which the probability is 32667 and the probability is 31767) is irregular and random. Thus, for example, the game ball is raised by irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 in some way. Even if cheating is done as if entering the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is either of the ranges of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) by the counter in the second cycle The required time is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (the first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1 and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from time T1 to the fourth cycle is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the initial value update type counter, the fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter is the minimum value (the first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) (periodicity The player is not aware of this by leaving the

13-3. Main control side power on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a main control side power-on process, as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S10, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 24 (step S11). The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, with its logic being LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a. Be done. Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether a power failure advance signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure notice voltage and become stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. In the determination of step S14, it is determined whether the power failure advance signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22 as a power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilized after the power is turned on in step S14, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. It stops (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Following step S15, it is determined whether the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is operated (step S16). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 and determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI Control switch 860a is not operated, while when the logic of the operation signal from operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and operation switch 860a is operated. It is determined that there is.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear notification flag The value 0 is set to RCL-FLG (step S20). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a, and it is a game related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete information, and is set to a value of 1 when deleting game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting game information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time (boot timer) until boot. Note that, as described above, the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole is supplied to the concave 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. At the time of power recovery, when mounted, the peripheral control unit in peripheral control board 4140 as a control signal from communication control circuit 4162a in which information with portable terminal 470 mounted in recess 314d is shown in FIG. The peripheral control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a 4150 is input to various parallel I / O ports 4150ag. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal to the communication control circuit 4162a from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and the portable terminal 470 Communication initialization is carried out to exchange information (various data) by radio in both directions. Therefore, in the wait timer process 2 in step S22, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 waits until the system is booted. Although the time to boot (boot timer) is set, it is set to the time to wait until the system that performs the drawing control of the gaming board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 described above starts up (boots). It is the same time as 2 seconds (s).

  Following step S22, it is determined whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Following step S26, whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off time) described later It is determined (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 at step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is ended normally, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery time (step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0, the power recovery information is read out from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where power has been turned on after the power has been shut off, as well as the state where power has been restored since a power failure or a momentary power failure, and detection of high frequency irradiation being detected. Also includes the state of recovery after that.

  Following step S32, a power on command generation process is performed (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) at step S24, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S28. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) at step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, this is performed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read out from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a instructs the RAM clear when deleting the game information, the main control MPU 4100a normalizes the processing when the sum value does not match, or when the main control power is turned off. If it has not ended, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter updating the random number for big hit judgment. An initial value deriving process for deriving a fixed value of is performed, and this fixed value is set to a random number for determining a jackpot determining initial value to be used for determining the initial value of the above-described jackpot determining random number.

  Following step S36, a work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). In this setting, initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S38, a RAM clear notification and test command creation process are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power on command divided into power on shown in FIG. 34 for clearing the main control built-in RAM and reporting that initialization has been performed is created and peripheral Test commands classified into the test relation shown in FIG. 35 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S44). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S44, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S48 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S48, non-coincidence random number update processing is performed (step S50). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number regardless of the collision judgment (big hit judgment) is updated. In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether or not there is an input of a power failure notification signal. For example, the non-coincidence random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeatedly performed. The process of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the output of the power failure clear signal is started (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  Subsequent to step S53, as shown in FIG. 11, the start opening solenoid 2105, the attachment solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the lower special symbol memory display 1187 The drive signal being output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Following step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S58, the watchdog timer clear setting is performed (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as described above.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs this main control side power-on process again. The process of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

13-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 39 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Following step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the game winning balls 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. The detection signal from the general winning hole switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 11 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11 which detects the game ball entered in 2103, the game ball shown in FIG. 8 which detects the game ball entered in the upper start opening 2101 shown in FIG. A detection signal from 3022, a gaming ball having entered the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8 is detected. A detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11 has passed the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting a game ball, the detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet shown in FIG. The payout ACK signal transmitted from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 indicating that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 has been received normally is read out from the payout control board 4110 and input information storage area as input information. Remember. In addition, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball which entered the upper starting opening 2101 and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 which detects the game ball which entered the lower starting opening 2102 are read respectively. The start-up winning command divided into the other parts shown in FIG. 35 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, A starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the upper starting opening 2101, detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls entering the upper starting opening 2101, detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls entering the lower starting opening 2102 The detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed , Read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are spread over the first to third times. Therefore, false reading due to the influence of chattering or noise can be avoided by performing two readings, ie, two readings to compare and two readings comparing to the second to fourth times. Since it is made possible, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109 and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, a timer subtraction process is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process, the ordinary symbol to be described later The payout control board 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in addition to the time for the normal symbol display 1189 to light in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the payer ACK signal for notifying that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a true random number update process is performed (step S78). In this success random number update process, the above-described random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit symbol, and the random number for small hit symbol are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter is only executed each time this hit random number update processing is performed. Count up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value) The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this false random number updating process. The jackpot determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing. The normal symbol determination random number is the same as the above-described method for updating the jackpot determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 38 (main control shown in FIG. 38, random number for determining the big hit determination initial value, big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and small hit symbol initial value determination random number The main process is updated in step S50 of the non-incidence random number update process in step S50 and in the main control side timer interrupt process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process. When the number of times of execution of the non random random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time from the occurrence of unevenness in the processing time of the next to the generation of the next interrupt timer. Step S50: A random number for determining the initial value for the big hit, a random number for determining the initial value for the large hit symbol, and a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Following step S78, a winning ball control process is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, input field is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input field, a prize ball command shown in FIG. The self-check command shown in FIG. 33 is generated to confirm the connection between the delivery control substrate 4110 and the substrate. Then, the prize ball command and the self check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or this prize ball command When a dispenser ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 4110 has been received normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self check command is generated to confirm the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110. And sends it to the payout control board 4110.

  Following step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame state 2 command) divided into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when the various commands are normally received as the payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as the output information in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM. . In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame divided into state display in FIG. 35) State 2 command)) is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Following step S82, a cheating detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 2103) A prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 35 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric combination product control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned big hit judgment random number is taken out and it is judged whether it matches with the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit Determine whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery".) Or take out the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number, and with the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not to generate a probability change). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. A value of 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. As described above, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control internal ROM When determining whether or not the jackpot determination random number is updated, it is determined whether the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper starting opening switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 34 are created, while the lottery results are based on the lower starting opening switch 2109 34 creates various commands related to special effects 2 tuning effects shown in FIG. 34, stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and displays the special symbol display 1185 or the upper special symbol display according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so that the lower special symbol display 1186 is turned on, and is stored in the above-described output information storage area as output information. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 shown in FIG. A close display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times (round), as shown in the figure. 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in 10 The output of the lighting signal to the sound display lamp 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1190b of the round display 1190 shown in 89 is lighted The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set to be stored, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color to the gaming state indicator 1183 The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, a control of normal symbol and normal electric combination is performed (step S88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information Remember to

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is operated to open and close is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be accepted to the lower starting opening 2102 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the common figure synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 34 are created and transmitted information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the above mentioned output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the common electric circuit production shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored in the above-described output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the random number for determination for the selected ordinary symbol does not match the determination value for the ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the ordinary symbol is displayed based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern. The variable display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 34 are created, and are described above as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the communication information storage area, and the output information storage described above as the output information Store in the area.

  Following step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and various signals are output based on the output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110 or the big hit In the gaming state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 and outputting a driving signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 for opening and closing the movable piece 2106. , 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability variation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output information, starting opening winning information output signal etc Output various information (gaming information) signals regarding the game of the game to the payout control board 4110 To.

  Following step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read out from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 34 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as regular drawing related effects, various commands classified as ordinary electric circuit related effects, shown in FIG. The various commands classified into the notification display, the various commands classified into the state display, the various commands classified into the test relation, and the various commands classified into others are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Following step S92, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, whereby the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S94, switching (restoration) of the register is performed (step S96), and this routine is ended. Here, when the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general purpose register on the stack in a hardware manner and saves it. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the main control side main processing. At step S96, the contents stored in the stack and read out are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, and FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the continuation of processing at power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 45 is a sprocket FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball look determination process, and FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the winning ball stock number addition process for the rental balls, and FIG. 49 shows an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 52 is an example of the ball look-up operation setting process. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball coverage determination processing, prize Ball prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, withdrawal ball look operation judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball look operation setting processing, retry operation monitor processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball sight determination processing, prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball viewing operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Performed as processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock ball number Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, and the processing for setting out the movement of the balls to be judged Priority in turn has been set.

[14-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, input / output setting (input / output setting for I / O) is performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, settings and the like of various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120 a are performed.

  Following step S502, wait timer process 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether a power failure advance signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, A notice signal (delivery blackout notice signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from power-on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequently to step S508, it is determined whether the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). In this determination, based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, the operation switch 860a determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM. When it is determined that the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the value 1 is set to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear The notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, various flags and various information storage areas stored in a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. Various information etc. (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area and the CR communication information storage area Is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set is erased, and the value 1 when dispensing information is erased, payout information The value is set to 0 when not erasing. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Following step S514 or step S516, a setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM is performed (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Subsequent to step S520, it is determined whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power off process (power off) described later (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is ended normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not ended normally.

  If it is determined in step S528 that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is equal to 1, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, a working area of the payout control internal RAM is set as a power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value “0” to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from a ROM (hereinafter referred to as “dispense control internal ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. Power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control internal RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or the checksum values do not match in step S526, or If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 in S528 (is 0), that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, a work area of the payout control internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Subsequently to step S539, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notification signal (a payout failure notification signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or when a power failure or momentary stop occurs, the power failure notification signal (disbursed power failure notification signal) is sent to the main control board as a power failure notification when the voltage drops below the power failure notification voltage. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e of 4100. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When the power failure advance notice signal is not input in step S540, it is determined whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, if 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and it is determined whether a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 at step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that the various commands (the prize ball command and the self check command shown in FIG. 33) related to the delivery from the main control board 4100 are normally received, the payout motor 744 There are stored various information such as drive information for performing drive control, winning ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 744 has actually paid out game balls, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator 860b. When various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, a payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or a payout motor The drive signal is output to 744 or the payout motor 744 actually pays out the number of balls for which the game balls have been paid out. (In this embodiment, the payout ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 every time the payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls). A display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Following step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal A main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 4100 for notifying that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process to be described later is read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, a timer update process is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the spherical light set as the determination condition is determined Time is set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 3 are discharged, and the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. When it is determined whether or not the holding space for the ball cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full, it is determined whether the ball is full or not. When it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply path of the winning ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball breaking switch 750 for a time, as the determination condition Besides performing time management such as the ball out determination time which has been determined, etc., the number of balls of the gaming balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls actually detected by the count switch 751, Inconsistencies that are set as the criteria for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the inconsistencies is repeated. Manage time of counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so every time this timer update processing is performed, the ball judging time is reduced by 2 ms and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball is accurately measuring the judgment time.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full determination time is 504 ms, the ball out determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (approximately 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are each reduced by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. The extraction determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above Determine The payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. As a result, even when the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. The game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a causes a momentary stop or power failure when the gaming ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game balls can not be continued, the number of ball stock PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. by being restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as payout backup information. Immediately before the momentary stop or power failure, exchange of various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop upon power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary stop or stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6.

  In addition, as described above, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. It is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the winning ball device 740 is abnormal, that is, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and the payout ball is subjected to the operation judgment setting processing. As an output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not in communication with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Output to CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of the power recovery, it is extremely after the power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. It can be informed that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko gaming When the machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball connection device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. When the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI to output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic is LOW, That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are the gaming ball lending devices, etc. When not electrically connected through the connection terminal plate 869, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW to indicate that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible, and the predetermined state of the dispensing control MPU 4120a Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the output port of The state of the logic of the EXS signal which indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is used together with the dispensing control board 4110. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored as CR connection information in the state information storage area.

  Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the storage space of the above-described far cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full switch 550 based on this input information. It is determined whether the game ball is full or not, or the number of balls of the game ball taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 described above by the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is determined whether or not the For example, the determination as to whether or not the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540 is full with stored gaming balls uses a timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check that the current full tank and full ball check process are full. When the detection signal from 550 is ON and the detection signal from full switch 550 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and full ball check process, that is, the detection signal from full switch 550 is from OFF to ON If it is determined that the time has passed, counting of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process Determine if In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the state information storage described above indicates the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is full with the gaming balls stored therein. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from full tank switch 550 is OFF, full tank information is stored in the state information storage area to indicate that the storage space of far cover unit 540 is not full with gaming balls stored therein. .

  It is also determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current tank full / ball out check process. When the detection signal from the disconnection switch is ON, and the detection signal from the disconnection switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball disconnection check processing, that is, the detection signal from the disconnection switch 750 is turned on When it is transitioned to the timing of the ball out determination time (119 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. When the ball out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the out of ball switch 750 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process Determine if In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON, the out-of-ball information notifying that the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is a predetermined number or more While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is OFF, it is determined that the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100 (a prize ball command and a self check command shown in FIG. 33) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lent balls, ball removal and ball sighting are performed, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. Do.

  Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created and is output information storage area described above as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball out information, the corresponding display data (In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame divided into the state display shown in FIG. State 2 command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 or the like. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, when the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on the out-of-ball information, It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 or the like.

  Following step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure notification signal (delivery power failure notification signal) is input. If there is no input of the advance notice signal (payout failure advance notice signal), it is determined in step S 542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 and this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1, that is, When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, and the port is processed in step S550. Input processing is performed, and in step S552, timer update processing is performed, At step S554, CR communication processing is performed, at step S556, full tank and ball out check processing are performed, at step S558, command reception processing is performed, at step S560 command analysis processing is performed, and at step S562 main operation setting processing is performed. The LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a changes. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control substrate 4100 a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when there is an input of the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Following step S574, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the value of the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Following step S580, the setting for inhibiting access to the payout control internal RAM is performed (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and then the payout control MPU 4120a performs the processing at power-on of the payout control unit again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[14-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Following step S592, switching (restoration) of the register is performed (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequently to step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine is ended.

[14-3. Rotation angle switch history creation processing]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. (Step S610). The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequently to step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read out from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, a detection slit for grasping the rotational position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted It is determined that the state has transitioned to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, it is determined that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non blocking state to the blocking state.

  When it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, shift processing of rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S614). In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2 , B 2 B B 1, B 1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B 0, etc., shift from the least significant bit B 0 to the most significant bit B 7 by one bit at a time.

  Following step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, shift processing of rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S618). In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is the most significant bit. B7 B B6, B6 5 B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 最 下 位 B1, B1 最 下 位 least significant bit B0, etc., shift one bit at a time from least significant bit B0 toward most significant bit B7 Do.

  Following step S618, the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to a value 0 (step S620), and this routine is ended.

  As described above, every time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or 1 according to a state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip process]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In the sprocket fixed position determination skip process, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotary member to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is at the regular position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the winning ball device 740 is finished. This makes it possible to reliably start the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, as shown in FIG. 45, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 or not. Is determined (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and the value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when not skipping).

  When it is determined in step S630 that the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value 0 (does not skip), that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle is stored from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and a lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that it is the state which changed to the non-blocking state from the blocking state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 12 rotates four steps. The rotation of the dispensing motor 744 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the discharge rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 744. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body is determined, the rotation angle switch 752 is used. History of detection signal, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 44, lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, ie This is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 due to the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash. Can. Therefore, since the erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body due to the backlash can be prevented, the rotational position of the dispensing rotating body can be properly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S634, the home position determination skip flag The value 1 is set to SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can be set so as not to perform fixed position determination of the payout rotating body (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body at step S636 as the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Following step S636, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S638), and this routine is ended. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of concave portions of the dispensing rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control MPU 4120a manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 75 to transition from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as "edge detection state"); A state where the optical axis of the switch 752 is shifted from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state It manages in three states of the state ("fixed position determination skip state"), and. The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the dispensing motor 744, and the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the four step rotation of the dispensing motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3) In this case, the rotation position corresponds to 13 steps of the dispensing motor 744, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the dispensing rotating member, is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so that the skip determination time is the time during which the dispensing motor 744 rotates by 13 steps. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  Since the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, subtraction of the skip determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in the above and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is ended as it is. The home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The gaming balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the gaming balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is under the influence of noise and is in the file environment. The rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the gaming ball. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the in-prize ball case inner board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from unblocked to blocked In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is enhanced. In addition, since the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-5. Ball sight judging process]
Next, the ball look determination process will be described. In this ball sight judging process, it is judged whether or not the ball sighting state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball judging process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is, as shown in FIG. 46, a rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequently to step S640, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the detection slit has a rotational angle It is a state where the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S642 The value 1 is set to the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, value 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing a blind movement The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Following step S644, the ball is set to valid determination time (step S646), and this routine is ended. By making this ball look determination time effective, subtraction of the ball look determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payment control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[14-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing and rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, and the prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing is from the main control board 4100. The processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out on the basis of the winning ball command described later, the processing for adding the number of balls for winning ball stock number for rental balls is a processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the rental ball request signal from the CR unit 6 is there. First, a winning ball stock number adding process for winning balls will be described, and then, a winning ball stock number adding process for rental balls will be described. In the present embodiment, it is set that the winning ball stock number adding process for the winning balls is preferentially performed, and the winning ball stock number adding process is performed according to the winning ball stock number adding process. After the gaming balls have been paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set to carry out the processing for adding the number of balls for the number of balls for the ball for rental.

[14-6-1. Prize Ball Stock Ball Addition Number Processing]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether there is a prize ball command or not, as shown in FIG. S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read out from the received command information storage area, and it is determined whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not the winning ball command in step S650, this routine is ended as it is, while if the received command information is the winning ball command in step S650, the winning ball number PBV corresponding to the winning ball command is It reads from the number information table (step S652). Although this prize ball number information table will be described in detail later, the prize ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. ing. As a result, the winning ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the winning ball stock number PBS is read out from the winning ball information storage area.

  The winning ball number PBV read out in step S652 is added to the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S654 (step S656), and this routine is ended. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[14-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls]
Next, a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball will be described. When the ball awarding process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether there is a ball lending request signal as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the lent ball request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the rental ball request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a rental ball request signal.

  If there is no rental ball request signal at step S660, this routine is ended as it is, while if there is a rental ball request signal at step S660, the winning ball stock number PBS is read out from the winning ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. (Step S662) The number of balls to be lent RBV is added to the number of prize balls stock PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of balls to be lent RBV is a fixed value, and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of balls to be lent RBV. Note that after the addition in step S664, the ball lending request signal read out in step S660 is erased from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning balls are prioritized (the winning balls and the lent balls are managed separately), the lent ball request signal is held even when there is a lent ball request signal. , Pay out the rental balls with the completion of the delivery of the winning balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning balls stock number PBS is set to 0 and the payout of the rental balls is performed.

[14-7. Stock surveillance process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether the game is not continued in a state (stocked state) in which the storage space of the far cover unit 540 shown in FIG. Processing.

  When stock monitoring processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 receives the number of ball stock PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. It is read out (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read out prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the dispensing built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold value TH.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S674), and this routine is ended. In this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the gaming balls in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid gaming balls (the number of prize balls stocked above) becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or more.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  When the gaming state becomes a big hit and the player is relaxed and looks forward to the effects developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 shown in FIG. 14, the player is inadvertently gone for one round During this time, the gaming balls paid out as winning balls may not be pulled out from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower tray 302 is filled with gaming balls, and the gaming balls accumulate in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with gaming balls, as described above, the value of the winning ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH, and provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect Several LEDs of various decoration boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to tell the store clerk in the hall that the player's game is to be watched. Thus, the store clerk in the hall can notify the player that the game ball should be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the housing space of the far cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the continuation of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 which can be represented by one byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to notify the store clerk in the hall to warn the player of the game at the earliest possible stage.

[14-8. Disbursement ball look operation judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, the game ball is paid out by the payout motor 744 to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. It is the processing which sets up whether it does not carry out or discharge etc.

  When the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 is, as shown in FIG. The rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the above (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S 680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S682, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether FLG is the value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described below is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry) When the operation is operating normally), the values are respectively set to 0.

  If, in step S682, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not in the abnormal operation, it is determined whether or not the ball viewing flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 ( Step S686). The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the ball for the payout motor 744 is spherical A value of 1 is set when the operation is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball is not looking down.

  When the flag PEB-FLG is not 1 in the step S686 (ie, the value 0), that is, when the ball is not in motion, the prize ball stock from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above. The number PBS is read out (step S688), and it is determined whether the read out ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls Step S692). This determination is performed based on the fullness information stored in the fullness and step check processing of step S556 in the payout control portion power-on process (disbursement control portion main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full of the stored gaming balls, then a payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out the gaming balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the fal cover unit 540 is full of the stored gaming balls, this routine is ended as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped when the gaming sphere filled with the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540 is full. If a winning ball occurs while the dispensing motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the dispensing motor 744 increases, and the winning ball stock number PBS is added by the winning ball stock ball addition processing shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (is the value 0) at step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, this routine is ended as it is. Thus, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball is in focus at step S686 and the flag PBE-FLG is 1, that is, the ball is in motion, the ball is subjected to action setting processing (step S700), and this routine is ended. In this ball facing operation setting process, a ball facing operation is performed to eliminate the state of the ball by the payout rotating body of the winning ball device 740.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is in abnormal operation, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). . In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S702, the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine is ended. In step S704, when the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, held down, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and the CR communication information storage area is set. Remember. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 to CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR control process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . Note that, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and held) the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI If at all (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

[14-8-1. Disbursement setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to perform the setting for paying out the gaming balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 reads out the number of drive commands DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 51 (step S710). The drive command number DRV is used to command the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equal to the number of stock balls PBS. The number of drive commands DRV is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S710, the number DRV of drive instructions is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequently to step S710, it is determined whether the number of drive instructions DRV is 0 or not (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive instruction number DRV whether or not the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the number of drive commands DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of balls of the game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequently to step S714, the number of balls stock PBS is read out from the memory of prize balls stored in the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read out (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although this count will be described in detail later, the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42 is performed from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. At step S 718, the real ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S718, the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB read out in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720) The real sphere count PB is set to the value 0 (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are the value 0, at step S722, the value of the award ball stock number PBS read out at step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive instruction number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of gaming balls to be dispensed by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S724, the drive command number DRV is decremented by 1 (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S 728, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, the real sphere count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S730), and this routine is ended. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, this routine ends. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120 a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S 726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination of step S 728, that is, when not incrementing the real sphere count PB It is determined that one ball can not pay out the game ball because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS as the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real sphere count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one sphere to be paid out may be included in the prize sphere stock number PBS. Yes, in other words, since the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, it is possible to perform a retry operation to again pay out the one ball to be paid out. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game balls will not be paid out to the player, and the disadvantage of the player due to the non-payment of the game balls can be prevented.

[14-8-2. Ball clasp movement setting process]
Next, the ball look-up operation setting process will be described. In this ball facing operation setting process, setting is performed to eliminate the state of the ball from the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball facing operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball sighting determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 52 (step S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere determination time which is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball judging time is stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the determination time.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball has not passed the determination time, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

  Subsequently to step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is viewed The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S754, the payout motor 744 The stop of the drive signal is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequently to step S758, the ball is set to the value of 0 for the flag PBE-FLG while the ball is looking at the end of the motion (step S760), and this routine is ended. This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, value 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing a blind movement The value is set to 0 when the operation is not being performed (the end of the ball leaning operation).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S750 that the ball determination time has elapsed, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S762, the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, when the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 to notify the CR unit 6 that it is currently in a state that it is not possible to lend a ball (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, ie, held down, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area Do. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 to CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR control process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . As described above, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” maintains the logic LOW of the EXS signal when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of H is HI (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain that logic HI.

  Following step S764, as the end of the ball gliding operation, the ball is flagged to set the value PBE-FLG to 0 (step S766), and this routine is ended.

[14-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the gaming ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, as shown in FIG. 53, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is a rotation angle switch from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S770).

  Subsequently to step S770, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this home position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value coincide with each other, The value 1 is added (increment, step S774). This misalignment counter INCC is received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls of the gaming balls dispensed and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751; Because the number of balls of the game balls received and paid out by the depressions of the payout rotary body is usually the same as the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. , The value 0. Since the payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 51, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the count switch actually It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls which are inconsistent due to the incoincidence detected at 751 are repeatedly paid out by monitoring the incoherence counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value At this time, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the input information is read out from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S776, the value of 1 is subtracted from the mismatch counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a single inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about a few millionths, and in this embodiment, it is inconsistent. The value 5 is set as the threshold value INCTH.

  In the processing for setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power on processing of FIG. Information to be used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to a value such as the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It can be done. Thereby, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740, which has been performed immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, when the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, for example, immediately before the instantaneous interruption or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally. It can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal status by the determination of step S780. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S780 that the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is not smaller than the incompatibility threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is in abnormal operation, that is, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is abnormal. It is determined that the game is in the state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in the abnormal state in the determination of step S780.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a "retry error" is indicated. To notify, set retry error information to display the number “5” on the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110 and set the above-mentioned state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Are set (stored) (step S782).

  Following step S782, the value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of mismatch counter INCC is greater than mismatch threshold INCTH, step S784 is performed. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of the external factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 4100a erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and outputs a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Thus, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine is ended. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (the retry operation is It is respectively set to the value 0 when operating normally.

  The payout control MPU 4120a sets the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566, a retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 4100, and in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b is created. A drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area as the LED display information and stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860b. The main control board 4100 having received the status command transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. 14 has a door frame side lighting blink command for emitting a lighting signal by causing a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs, and makes a plurality of LEDs emit light in a predetermined color. The store clerk or the like in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs, as described above, opens the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 to set the numeral “on the error LED display 860 b mounted on the payout control board 4110. It can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred by visually observing that “5” is displayed. As a result, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 751, contact failure of various connectors, etc. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified, it can be performed extremely quickly.

  In addition, by intentionally putting the counting switch 751 into the inoperative state, the above-described detection of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted If the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, even if a fraudulent action is made to forcibly generate a retry operation and illegally acquire the gaming ball paid out by this retry operation. Since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a clerk or the like in a hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. Even if the value of the inconsistence counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls As a result, damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the count switch 751 can be minimized.

  Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of an internal factor that has become an issue. As a result, for example, the mismatch counter INCC is not initialized in response to the occurrence of an external factor such as operating the operation switch 860a to clear the error. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is altered illegally and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an unauthorized action. There is no

[14-10. Mismatched counter reset judgment processing]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this misalignment counter reset process, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751. It is a process which determines whether the inconsistency counter INCC which calculates the difference of, is reset.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S 790, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S 790 that the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours).

  Following step S792, the value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the above-mentioned award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S794), and this routine is ended. As described above, the misalignment counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the gaming balls normally received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 Because it does, it becomes the value 0. Since the payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 51, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the count switch actually It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls which are inconsistent due to the incoincidence detected at 751 are repeatedly paid out by monitoring the incoherence counter INCC. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about one in several million.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made up of the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 or the like on which the game board 4 is mounted, and replacing the game board 4 Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the winning ball device 740, the drive power source for the winning ball device 740, and the power source board 851 for generating the control power for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine the abnormal operation whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the dispensing control unit power-off process in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 42, the inconsistency controller INCC just before shutting down is stored when the power is shut off, while the dispensing control unit power-on shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the hour process (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the process is started again from the stored mismatch counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 4 installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off and the game board 4 'having another game specification different from the game board 4 is replaced to turn on the power, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120 a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 restarts processing from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the gaming board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the gaming board 4 'is attached, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the gaming board 4 before replacement is attached is directly taken over. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 with the game board 4 'mounted thereon, and the number of unintended game balls is generated with an odd probability of one-millionth, and the inconsistency counter INCC Is increased and the incoincidence counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the incoincidence value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 4120a determines it as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period by replacing the game board 4 with the game board 4 '. There is a risk of That is, during a short time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ', the malfunction of the count switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the count switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, etc. There is a possibility that the abnormal operation of the retry operation may be determined suddenly even though

  As described above, when it is determined that the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 'and the retry operation is determined to be an abnormal operation in a short period, the exchanged game board 4' has an impression of being easily broken despite being new. It may be given to the player. The probability of a few millionth that one game ball being dissatisfied due to the retry operation is paid out is installed in the hall and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is operated continuously for one week during the hall opening hours. In this case, since it is the same as the probability that a game ball inconsistent with the retry operation is paid out by one retry operation, millions of minutes from the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It will be in the state where only the value 1 is not drawn by the probability of 1. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1; in 2 weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 2. In week, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC becomes 3, and in 4 weeks, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC is 4, and in 5 weeks When the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1, the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the above-mentioned mismatch threshold INCTH. That is, when five weeks have passed, the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the count value from the count switch 751 is determined in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 53 in order for the mismatch counter INCC to coincide with the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that the malfunction of the count switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the count switch 751 to the discharge control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. In the process of step S 782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 53, in order to notify that it is a “retry error”, the numeral “on the error LED display 860 b which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. Set retry error information to display “5”, and the payout control built-in R So that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of M.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this mismatch counter reset determination processing, that is, it repeatedly performs the mismatch counter reset every 7000s (about 2 hours). In the process of step S 794 in the determination process, the value 0 is forcibly set to the mismatch counter INCC, that is, the reset is performed forcibly, thereby incrementing the mismatch counter INCC generated with the probability of a few millions of parts described above. It is invalidated. As a result, although there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the dispensing control board 4110 from the counting switch 751, contact failure of various connectors, etc., an error occurs in the retry operation. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that, by intentionally putting the counting switch 751 into the inoperative state, the above-described detection of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted Even in the case where the retry operation is forcibly generated and the fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the gaming ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, the above-described is the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally made to be inactive for a short time. Thus, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so a store clerk or the like in the hall takes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It will rush to confirm. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. On the other hand, in the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally and repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is generated every 7000s (about 2 hours). During this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who has made a fraudulent activity is, as described above, up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the counting switch 751 is intentionally set. Even if the game player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, it is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent acts.

[14-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 12 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 determines whether the operation switch 860a is operated to release the error, as shown in FIG. (Step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the input information is read out from the input information storage area, and when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is judged that it does not instruct to perform the error release, and the operation switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that an error cancellation is instructed, and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated at step S800, this routine is ended as it is, while when the operation switch 860a is operated at step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the winning ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normal). Because it is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1.

  Following step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is The payout control built-in RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area. Thus, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area, and the read status information The state command is created based on the above and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, it is indicated that an error occurs in the retry operation. When retry error information to be conveyed is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 having received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39, and the peripheral control board 4140 A retry operation error notification process of notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation is performed. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Please check the winning ball unit.” And “Please check the harness of the payout control board.” Repeatedly sent to the store clerk or the like in the hall by flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. It is supposed to The store clerk or the like in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation breaks the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 12, breaks the various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 751, makes contact failure of various connectors, etc. As compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, it can be confirmed extremely quickly. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, the plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, release setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is handled. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forced to stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or that the ball can be rented. In order to communicate to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held HI, that is, held up, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 Output to the CR unit 6 via For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED display 860b is already displayed. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the numeral “5” notifying that it is “retry error” It forcibly overwrites the information on which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed. Also, in order to tell the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is held HI, that is, it keeps up and the gaming ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. And the like to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Following step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine is ended. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is maintained at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. .

  Thus, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the process of step S786 in the same process, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 while the operation switch 860a is operated, which causes this external factor to be triggered. The value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in response to the occurrence, and the initialization is performed. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM to cancel the error. As in the case where the switch 860a is operated, it is initialized upon occurrence of this external factor.

[14-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of a dispensing operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently, an input signal confirmation process from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of gaming balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen is performed twice as the amount of money) is the number of lent balls, The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read out the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and are stored in the read input information, and the CR communication processing is performed. , From the input information, confirms the logic state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal every 2 ms which is an interrupt timer period.

[14-12-1. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball rental]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the lent ball. When the state of the logic of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to communicate the logic of the PRDY signal as HI, that is, start up and hold and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player operates the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360 shown in FIG. 2 by the player, the ball rental switch 365b is turned on (turned on). An operation signal is input from the frequency display plate 365 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as TDS shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS has been input pays out the number of gaming balls worth 200 yen as the amount of money for the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) through the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1) . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input is set to the loan request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing H1. Until the lapse of), a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (100 yen as the amount of money) (1) to monitor whether or not BRQ, which is a request signal for starting dispensing operation for dispensing one, has risen.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the gaming ball for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the rental ball number among the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as an amount, FIG. As shown in), until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal thereof Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4120a starts the BRQ request comprehension ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in this embodiment, In order to indicate that one dispensing operation has been started until 20 ms ± 1 ms has elapsed, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the activated state is held and the dispensing control MPU 4120a Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as EXS (timing H3).

  The CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input is, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), from the timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed. The BRQ that has been raised and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses from timing H4. It goes and pays out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the number of balls for the predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of gaming balls for 100 yen. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal which has been raised and held from timing H3 is held at the logic LOW, that is, held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. , EXS are output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining ball number of the game ball for 100 yen out of the ball number of the game ball for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the rental ball number, as shown in FIG. ) Until the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, it is set to 268 ms at maximum) from the timing H5, the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board from the CR unit 6 The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  As shown in FIG. 56C, the payout control MPU 4120a similarly pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls using the above-described method. The EXS signal which has been raised and held is held with its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and connected as a game ball lending device connection terminal as EXS. The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 stands from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 56 (a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, delivery monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF is the delivery control shown in FIG. It is clocked by the timer update process of step S 552 in the processing at the time of turning on the division power supply (delivery control unit main processing).

  The payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is out, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (BRDY logic from the CR unit 6) Is low, that is, when it falls and is held, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the PRDY signal which is raised and held from timing H1 is set to the state where the logic is LOW, that It holds and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the game ball connection device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the state of the logic of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is made, though not shown. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 4120a, and outputs it as the EXS to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( When the EXS signal is rising and held) is to maintain its logic HI.

  Thus, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of balls of the gaming ball for 200 yen as the amount, 100 as the amount. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with a 50-ball number of the lent balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. When a store clerk or the like in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 301 or the number of gaming balls for 100 yen as the amount of money When it is set to pay out to the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money, and the number of gaming balls of 500 yen as the amount of money as the amount of lent balls as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount five times, and the ball number of gaming balls for 1,000 yen as an amount When it is set to pay out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of balls to be lent, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen as an amount ten times.

[14-12-2. Confirmation process of input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can make the CR unit 6 perform BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even if the lending request monitoring time HA described above has elapsed. CR unit 6 connects BRDY from CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device even if the signal is not output to payout control board 4110 and the signal for the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the signal is not output via the terminal plate 869 and is not output to the payout control board 4110 and the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is not activated or Even if the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and lowers the signal. If not, the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS are used to confirm whether BRQ and BRDY are normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 (e) and 56 (f), when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA from this timing J0 (in this embodiment) , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, held down, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120 a of the payout control unit 4120. Output as a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, held down and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a To the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device board 869 as an EXS. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J1 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J1. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J2 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J2. In other words, hold it in the lowered state and output it from the output terminal of the specified output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output it to the CR unit 6 as the PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J3 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J3. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J4 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J4. In other words, it holds it in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J5 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J5 That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 59 is an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 4150a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters the state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, which is output from the main control board 4100 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko game machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 4150 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 4150 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d shown in FIG. (SRAM) is compared, and effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents are identical, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 15 and cleared to zero. After the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try to prevent it.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a may also perform communication initialization in this initialization setting process. The portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is turned on or turned off momentarily in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. When the portable terminal 470 is placed, information on the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d is input to the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. Be done. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal to the communication control circuit 4162a from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and the portable terminal 470 Communication initialization is carried out to exchange information (various data) by radio in both directions.

  In this communication initial setting, individual information acquisition processing for acquiring an ID number (No. 123 in this embodiment) from the portable terminal 470 is performed, and the ID number acquired in the individual information acquisition processing and the table of the pachinko gaming machine 1 An associating process is performed to associate the numbers (the machine numbers installed in the hall, No. 8 in the present embodiment). Thereby, in the communication initialization, in a state where the portable terminal 470 associated in the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 It is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various gaming devices provided on the board 4 can be started, and when this communication initialization is completed, the character of "game preparation complete" is carried to that effect. A state in which a large area is displayed in the center of the display area of the terminal 470 and nothing is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of power on or power recovery from a power failure (temporary interruption) It switches to the screen of the effect at the time of the portable terminal set mentioned later from the state used as a screen. In this portable terminal set effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 formed in a sunglass shape provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the gaming board 4 shown in FIG. Appears from the front position where it is difficult to see from the front to the approximate center position (rendering position) of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After being drawn at the center of the display area of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the “eyeball” is drawn by moving in the frame in the up, down, left, and right directions (FIGS. c) screen). On the other hand, in the communication initial setting, another portable terminal 470 'different from the portable terminal 470 associated in the association processing (except for the clerk portable terminal MST possessed by a clerk such as a clerk of a hall traveling in a hall) In the state where the other portable terminal 470 ′) is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the operation of various gaming devices provided on the game board 4 is A state where it can not be started can be maintained, and when this communication initialization is completed, the contents such as "The game is being played by another player" is said to be portable terminal 470 It is designed to be displayed large in the display area of.

  Following step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is controlled to have the LED brightness included in the obtained brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranging from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 described above is It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, a value 0 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Also, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Following step S1006, it is determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1009, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, through the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caa is byte by byte. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  Further, in the lamp data output process, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150 cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 5 is created by lamp data creation processing described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 4150 cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Following step S1012, a portable terminal monitoring process is performed (step S1013). In this portable terminal monitoring process, whether the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Monitor The peripheral control MPU 4150a is ready for the player to be seated on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start the game when the portable terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d in the portable terminal monitoring process. It is determined that there is no such thing, and the screen for notifying that it is away is set, the permission to perform the demonstration to be the screen in the customer waiting state is set, or after performing the demonstration, the power saving mode is set. Set up migration. On the other hand, when the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, as described above, the information is used as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. Since the O port 4150ag is to be input, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input outputs a control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. The communication control circuit 4162a is controlled to perform communication initial setting for exchanging information (various data) in a two-way wireless manner with the portable terminal 470.

  This communication initialization is the same as that executed in the initialization setting process of step S1000, and as described above, individual information acquisition for acquiring an ID number (No. 123 in this embodiment) from the portable terminal 470 A process is performed to associate the ID number acquired in the individual information acquisition process with the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). . Thereby, in the communication initialization, in a state where the portable terminal 470 associated in the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 It is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various gaming devices provided on the board 4 can be started, and when this communication initialization is completed, the character of "game preparation complete" is carried to that effect. Nothing is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the screen of the demonstration which is displayed large in the center of the display area of the terminal 470 and drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It switches to the screen of the effect at the time of the portable terminal set mentioned later from the state which is not displayed (that is, the state which becomes a black screen). In this portable terminal set effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 formed in a sunglass shape provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the gaming board 4 shown in FIG. Appears from the front position where it is difficult to see from the front to the approximate center position (rendering position) of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After being drawn at the center of the display area of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the “eyeball” is drawn by moving in the frame in the up, down, left, and right directions (FIGS. c) screen).

  Even when the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, the rotary handle main body by leaving the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 7 or interrupting the game shown in FIG. In the state where the palm and fingers are not separated from the front 506 and the game is not performed, the state where the game ball does not enter the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 continues and the holding ball is digested and becomes zero In the case of the state, permission for performing a demonstration to be a screen in a customer waiting state is set, and after performing the demonstration, transition to the power saving mode is set. On the other hand, in the communication initial setting, another portable terminal 470 'different from the portable terminal 470 associated in the association processing (except for the clerk portable terminal MST possessed by a clerk such as a clerk of a hall traveling in a hall) In a state where the portable terminal 470 ′) is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the operation of various gaming devices provided on the game board 4 is started. It is possible to maintain the state where it can not do, and when this communication initialization is completed, the content that “it is the base where the game is being played by another player” is supported by the association processing as that effect. The display area of the other portable terminal 470 ′ different from the attached portable terminal 470 is largely displayed, and the separation is drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The notification screen (for example, the screen in FIG. 66 described later) is maintained, and from such a screen, the game screen (for example, the screen in FIG. 65 (b) described later) is displayed on the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900. It does not switch to the status displayed on. In the mobile terminal monitoring process, in communication initial setting, another mobile terminal 470 ′ different from the associated mobile terminal 470 (other than the clerk mobile terminal MST possessed by a clerk such as a clerk of a hall traveling in a hall) The portable terminal 470 ') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, thereby starting the operation of various game devices provided on the game board 4 When maintaining the state where the player can not do, the game information display device process and the command transmission / reception process, which will be described later, are not performed.

  Further, in the mobile terminal monitoring process, following the communication initialization, the game information display device process is performed. In addition to outputting various signals to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14, this game information display device process is a game information display device in the game information display device information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The game information display device information acquisition storage area in Bank (1 ms) of backup management target work area 4150 ca of peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 15 in which various information of game information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from DCNT The various information from the game information display device DCNT is acquired based on the not shown), and the command corresponding to the acquired information is stored in Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Send command for mobile terminal in Set in a storage area (not shown).

  Further, in the portable terminal monitoring process, the command transmission / reception process is performed following the communication initialization and the game information display apparatus process. The command transmission / reception process is a process of transmitting / receiving various commands to / from the portable terminal 470. When various commands from the portable terminal 470 are received, they are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When various commands are set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for portable terminal in Bank (1fr) of backup management object work area 4150ca of peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, these set various commands are carried Transmit to terminal 470.

  Subsequent to step S1013, an operation unit monitoring process is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7. Information (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400) (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction)) And the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 or Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process to be described later from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 (In fact, while outputting the image data to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the image to the portable terminal 470 The data is output from the channel CH2 to the portable terminal 470 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the communication control unit 4162 shown in FIG. Thus, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470. It is designed to cancel the output. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing of step S1012. Loudspeaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by effects of the plurality of LEDs and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 by the plurality of LEDs and sound data output processing described later It becomes a mechanism which can give priority to synchronization of effects by music or sound effects according to various effects from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Following step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output process, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process to be described later is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. In addition, the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. The audio data transmission IC 4160 c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a, and directs the right side audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system that changes it into plus signal and minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music and sound effects according to various effects from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound It is also played in stereo.

  Following step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 15 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, reception command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the various commands received are analyzed and transmitted from the portable terminal 470. The various commands are received in the command transmission / reception process in the portable terminal monitoring process of step S1013, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. And analyze various commands stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 34 are various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 synchronous effect related, various commands classified as big hit related, power ON Are divided into various commands that are classified into general drawing tuning effects, various commands that are classified into regular electric connection effects, various commands that are classified into notification display shown in FIG. 35, and state display. There are various commands, various commands classified into test relation, and various commands classified into others. A variety of commands from the portable terminal 470 include a break time setting completion command indicating that a break time is set for taking a meal break or taking a break to suspend and refresh the game, a store clerk in a hall, etc. There is an agent call request command or the like for transmitting a request for calling an agent of

  Following step S1022, a warning process is performed (step S1024). In this warning processing, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 35, this is an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. which have been set, various control data of peripheral control ROM 4150 b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150 c It is extracted from the copy area 4150 ce and set to 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. In addition, when the door open command is included in the various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 35 in the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S102, the screen for setting the break time is displayed. A break time setting drawing command to be displayed is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is a backup management target work area 4150ca of peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in a transmission command storage area (not shown) for portable terminals in Bank (1 fr). In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data generation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the light emission mode generation schedule data, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. While being extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c, it is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa of peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Lighting on multiple LEDs of various decoration boards provided in Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a flash signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150 ce of peripheral control ROM 4150 b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150 c, The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 15 is set.

  Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is the peripheral control unit It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the portable terminal 470 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, among the sound command data arranged in time series that the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and that is the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, and controls the built-in sound source While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the data, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 15 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating (in this embodiment, The notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be flowed. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the game to create a more powerful screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 in addition to music and sound effects, or shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of doing.

  Subsequent to step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, to perform backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150 a are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 15, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule included in Bank0 (1fr) The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the data storage area 4150cae, the transmission command storage area for portable terminals (not shown), and the output data storage area for gaming information display device, is used as effect backup information (1fr) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies at high speed to Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) of backup first area 4150 cb, and peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of backup second area 4150 cc. Copy fast.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr), Bank 0 (1 fr) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy of backup second area 4150cc to Bank 4 (1fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  Further, in the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150 da shown in FIG. 15, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac performs high-speed operation on Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db as presentation information (SRAM), which is contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as presentation backup information (SRAM) And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 4150db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db sequentially by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM), Bank 0 (SRAM From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, to Bank 4 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), each second predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in the second area 4150 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af and the peripheral control external WDT 4 150 e so that the peripheral control MPU 4 150 a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as completion of peripheral control unit steady process execution (step S1038), and the process returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 0 Are set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts with setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing as the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is started in step S1010. , And step S1036 and finally, in step S1038, the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process, and the process is completed. It will be done. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is set to about 30 fps per second, so a V blank signal is input. The interval to be set is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 can be received is input from liquid crystal built-in VDP 4160a of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed triggered by the event will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 57 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. If the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. At the time of power-on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 57, the peripheral control unit in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal which is this routine indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value SP to 1 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in logic (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to notifying interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether there is any, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed every time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 59, peripheral control MPU 4150 a of peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is set to about 30 fps per second, so a V blank signal is input. The interval to be set is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. 15 are arranged in time series. Electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 14 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a Among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, drive signals to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration of It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 4150 caf is sent via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I drive for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf for 1 byte, external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 4150 cae of peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Peripheral control RAM 415 shown in 15 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board motor drive data SM-DAT that has been sent via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information , And movable position history information etc.) are set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input (for example, dial operation unit The rotation (rotational direction) history information of the 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, game information display device information acquisition processing is performed (step S1109). In this game information display device information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not various signals from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 have been input to record history information of various signals (for example, the game information display device DCNT Work of the backup management work of peripheral control RAM 4150c and peripheral control MPU 4150a externally connected, which created call clerk cancellation information etc. which conveys that the clerk call state has been released by operating the call button DCNTb. The game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the bank (1 ms) of the area 4150 ca is set. Various information from the gaming information display device DCNT can be acquired from history information of various signals from the gaming information display device DCNT set in the gaming information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown).

  Following step S1109, backup processing is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, to perform backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150 a are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150 ca shown in FIG. 15 for the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time The effect information (1 ms) which is the contents stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai and the game information display device information acquisition storage area is used as presentation backup information (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150 cb of Ba. k1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 4150 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa performs peripheral control D The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150 ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb is specified, and Bank 0 (1 ms) from the contents stored at the top address of Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), and Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the start address of) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and copy of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1109 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57, various processing relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of the effect is executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470, and the periphery control MPU 4150a and the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source are mounted Even in the production lot of control substrate 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, and triggered by this start, the peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 60 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which one byte (8 bits) of information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port built in the control MPU 4150a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the environment of accepting files. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100? It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. 15; peripheral command MPU 4150a and receive command storage area 4150cac of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received in the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is input from the main control board 4100 The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the blackout notification signal It is determined whether a signal is input (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, pachinko gaming machines are sequentially executed by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470, turning off the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4, and turning off the various LEDs. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can operate even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and reception command storage area 4150cac of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected with peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer The received command is stored in.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) in the backup target work area 4150 ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies to the Bank 2 (1 fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac copies to the Bank 2 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy the backup first area 4150cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) Content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The content stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored in the start address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac by the PU core 4150aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All data are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 so that peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Can not be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, while when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 57 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed. Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and released in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[16. Image Displayed in Display Area of Game Board Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Next, an image displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 62 to FIG. The image displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is the periphery of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 57 by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. It is drawn by executing control unit steady processing and the like. Thereby, various effects are advanced in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Here, first, when the portable terminal 470 is placed on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, it is displayed in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900. When the player touches the palm or finger of the rotating handle main body 506 shown in FIG. 7 to start the game, it is displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The game start effect to be played is described, and after the game start effect is started, the game ball is put in the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. A description will be given of the start winning inspirational effect displayed on the display area of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player inspires the game intention, and the effect at the start of the game is started and the first start winning is achieved. The first start winning limited effects displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described, the effects such as the variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described, An image of the absence notification displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described. FIG. 62 is a view showing an example of effect at the time of setting of a portable terminal displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 63 is a view of effect at the time of game start displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device FIG. 64 is a view showing an example, FIG. 64 is a view showing an example of the start winning inspirational effect and the initial start winning limited effect displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device, and FIG. FIG. 66 is a view showing an example of a variation display effect displayed in the display area of the display device, and FIG. 66 is a view showing an example of an image of absence notification displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device.

[16-1. Effects when mobile terminal is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device]
First, when the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. The effect at the time of set will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the player goes to the reception of the hall, receives the portable terminal 470, sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game, and enters the recess 314d formed on the right side of the tray unit 300. Is placed, the peripheral control board 4140 performs communication initial setting to exchange each information (various data) with the portable terminal 470 by wireless two-way, and acquires individual information acquisition processing for acquiring an ID number from the portable terminal 470 To associate the ID number acquired in the individual information acquisition process with the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). . When this association is completed, an effect is performed when the portable terminal is set. In this portable terminal set effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 formed in a sunglass shape provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the gaming board 4 shown in FIG. From the original position, which is difficult to visually recognize when viewed from the front, to approximately the center position (rendering position) of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  When the frame provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 descends to approximately the center position of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and appears, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the pink spheres are three-dimensionally By being drawn at the center of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the "eyeball" is expressed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), the “eyeball” is drawn in a mode in which the inside of the frame is moved in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  As described above, the player visually recognizes the movable aspect of the human-shaped machine (robot) which is the best feature of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before starting the game by touching the palm or finger in front of the rotary handle main body 506 shown in FIG. As such, it is possible to contribute to further improving the player's feeling of wanting to start the game.

[16-2. Effects at the start of the game displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device]
Next, when the player touches the front of the rotating handle main body 506 shown in FIG. 7 with a palm or finger to start the game, the game start effect displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is shown in FIG. Description will be made with reference to FIG. When the player touches the front of the rotating handle main body 506 with a palm or a finger in a state where the effect at the time of setting the portable terminal is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, as described above The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the control board 4110 transmits to the main control board 4100 that a palm or finger is touched on the rotary handle main body 506, and the main control board 4100 is palm on the rotary handle main body 506. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 performs effects at the start of the game since the fact that the finger is touched is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. In this effect at the start of the game, first of all, the frame formed and decorated in the sunglass shape provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front from a substantially central position (rendering position) of the display area, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is raised to the original position, which is a position where visual recognition is difficult, and waits. At this time, the pink sphere is not drawn either. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the image was switched to the image where the humanoid machine was put on the catapult in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and it was put on the catapult as shown in FIG. The entire image of the human-type machine is displayed in the display area of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 by being scrolled from the foot to the head of the human-type machine. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), an image of the pilot who got in the cockpit of the humanoid machine (robot) is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the pilot takes off in the cockpit. Proceed with preparation. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the image of the space seen from the catapult.

  In this manner, when the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 with a palm or finger to start the game, the effect at the start of the game is advanced to the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, while being able to board the cockpit of a humanoid machine (robot) and experience the world view of a humanoid machine (robot) simultaneously with the start of the game, it is developed to various effects of the humanoid machine (robot) It is possible to get a sense of expectation. As a result, when the player touches the rotary handle main body 506 with a palm or finger to start the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is synchronized with the player's feeling of playing the game, and the feeling is high By being in a mode as if it is being played, it can contribute to further improving the player's willingness to play the game.

  Also, the player is placing the portable terminal 470 received at the reception of the hall in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. The player sits in the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turns the front of the rotary handle 506 shown in FIG. 7 in the clockwise direction to fire the game ball from the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. Nevertheless, even if the game ball does not enter the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8 (start winning combination), the player keeps his palm or finger in front of the rotating handle main body 506. Since the effect at the start of the game is automatically advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player starts touching the game, the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 at the start of the game To The ball is adapted to be able to avoid a state in which the director is not at all proceed in a state that does not ball entrance (starting winning). As a result, the player's willingness to play the game due to stress such as frustration and a sense of humiliation that the effect does not advance at all in a state where the game ball does not enter the start opening 2101 or the bottom start opening 2102 at the start of the game (start winning). It is possible to suppress the decline. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play at the start of the game.

16-3. Startup winning inspirational effect displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device]
Next, after the game start effect described above is started, the player's game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. Start-up winning and inspirational effects displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when inspiring the will will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). The effect at the start of the game is advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player rotates the front of the rotary handle 506 clockwise to fire the game ball from the bat firing device 650 shown in FIG. If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed on the center combination 2300 shown in FIG. 8 without entering the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 (start winning combination) even if the game is started. After the game start effect, the start winning inspirational effect is advanced. As described above, the main control board 4100 is configured to transmit a command relating to a general rendering synchronization effect to the peripheral control board 4140 based on a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 provided in the gate unit 2350. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 performs start winning rendition following the effect at the game start. In this start-up winning inspirational effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), from the image of the space viewed from the catapult in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. Switch to the image of another humanoid machine (robot) in Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), together with the other humanoid machine (robot) shown in FIG. 64 (a), the image of the pilot boarding the cockpit is displayed as a balloon, and the pilot "Let's aim for a big hit!" Then, the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 63 (d) is switched to the image of the space seen from the catapult again.

  Even if the player rotates the front handle of the rotary handle 506 clockwise to cause the ball to be launched from the ball hitting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 to start the game, the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed in the center character 2300 without entering the ball (start winning), it is seen from the catapult in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. From the image of the outer space, as the start-up winning inspirational effect, an effect of progressing to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) and switching to the image shown in FIG. 63 (d) is repeatedly performed. The effect at the start of the game and the start-up winning inspiration are both effects relating to a humanoid machine (robot), and have mutually associated effect contents. In other words, even if the game start effect is switched from the start-up effect to the start-up live-in effect and the effect is progressed, the story is continued, and the start-up operation is switched from the play-out act to the game start effect again and the effect is advanced However, since the story is to be continued, even when the game start effect and the start-up winning inspirational effect are switched between each other, "the effect with the story" is continuously developed (progressed) ing.

  In this manner, when the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 with a palm or finger to start the game, the effect at the start of the game is advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Even if it is difficult to launch the game ball from the striking device launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and turn the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 into rotation (start winning), That is, by continuing the state where the gaming ball does not enter the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 as the starting area, it is possible for the player based on the gaming ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 A gate formed on center character 2300 when a game effect for deriving and displaying a winning determination result indicating whether or not a big hit gaming state to be generated occurs is not advanced When the 2350 game ball passes, we start winning inspiring demonstration Following game start effect in the display area of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be advanced. In the start-up winning inspirational effect, the player is encouraged (incentivized) to encourage the start-up to generate a big hit gaming state, so that the start-up is made at the start of the game. It can contribute to improving the player's feeling. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game from the start of the game to the progress of the game effect.

16-4. Initial start winning limited effect displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device]
Next, when the above-mentioned effect at the time of starting the game is started, when the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 are first entered (start winning), the first display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 The start winning combination limited effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (c) and (d). While the effect at the start of the game is being advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the player rotates the front handle of the rotary handle 506 clockwise to hit the ball launch device 650 shown in FIG. When the game ball is fired and the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 enter the ball (start winning combination), the game start effect is switched to the first start winning limited effect. In addition, when the above-described start-up winning inspirational effect is progressing in the display area of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the player rotates the front handle of the rotary handle 506 clockwise to play the game from the bat firing device 650. When the ball is fired and the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 enter the ball (starting winning combination), the starting winning inspirational effect is switched to the initial starting winning limited rendering. As described above, the main control board 4100, based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball received to the upper starting opening 2101, the command related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the lower starting opening Based on a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the ball 2102, a command relating to the special figure 2 tuning effect related is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the stage performs effects by switching from the start-up winning inspirational effect at the game start to the first-time start-up winning effect. In this first time start winning limited effect production, as shown in FIG. 64 (d) from the effect at the start of the game and the start winning action inspirational effect, a person who stands by catapult in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. An image of the pilot boarding in the cockpit is displayed as a balloon as well as the type machine (robot), and the pilot informs the crew as "D unit, let's go!", And the catapult is accelerated, as shown in FIG. As described above, a humanoid machine (robot) is ejected from the catapult to the outer space and started. Then, it becomes an effect during the battle of a humanoid machine (robot) in the outer space, and this effect is used as a background image, and variable display of a decorative symbol (see FIGS. 65 (a) and (b)) to be described later is started. .

  In this way, when the player touches the front of the rotating handle main body 506 with a palm or finger to start the game and then causes the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 to initially enter the ball (start winning), "Production with a story" that the effect is promoted by switching from the production or start winning inspiration to the first start winning limited production, and the effect is advanced, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started to be continuously developed (progressed) When the game start effect or start-up winning inspirational effect is switched to the first start-up winning limited effect production, the continuation of the game start effect or start-up winning inspirational effect is initially started by switching this effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It is designed to be continuously developed as a prize limited effect. For this reason, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a sense of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur in the result of the win determination due to the switching of the effect. In this way, the start of the game is started first after the game is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, the derivation display of the determination result of the winning judgment which tells whether or not the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player occurs) is started. It can contribute to improving the player's willingness to play step by step in each of the effects up to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game from the start of the game to the progress of the game effect.

16-5. Effects such as variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device]
Next, an image such as a variable display displayed in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control side main process of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 38 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the gaming ball to the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. The number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8 is 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), When the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is to be digested, and the big winning opening 2103 There every 1 sphere entering sphere, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) so that the game balls are paid out for.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the gaming ball to the lower starting opening 2102 is shown in FIG. 34 from the main control board 4100. The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variation display of the decoration symbol 1950a at the left side, the decoration symbol 1950b at the center, and the decoration symbol 1950c at the right side of the display area of the display device 1900 starts, and the variation indication of the decoration symbols 1950a to 1950c stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. The player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and at this time, the function shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the display unit 1180 It has become. When the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c become translucent so that the background image (representation during the battle of the humanoid machine (robot) in the above-described space can be seen) The symbol 1950a is from upper left to lower left of the display area, the decorative symbol 1950b is from upper center to lower center of the display area, and the decorative symbol 1950c is from upper right to lower right of the display area. Is displayed in a fluctuating manner as if it were rotating.

  As the variation display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started as shown in FIG. 65A and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol as described above. Become a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are If it is not stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern, it becomes "off". At this time, there is no holding ball (that is, the number of holdings regarding acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 in the upper special symbol memory display 1184 and lower special symbol memory display 1187 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. (The number of balls for holding balls) and the number of holding balls for receiving gaming balls to the lower starting opening 2102 (number of balls for holding balls are not displayed, respectively, when there are zero holding balls), upper starting opening 2101 or As described above, when the player is playing a game by touching the palm or finger of the rotating handle main body 506 shown in FIG. 7 even if the game ball does not enter the lower starting opening 2102 as described above, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 transmits to the main control substrate 4100 that a palm or finger is touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and performs mastering The substrate 4100 is adapted to convey to the peripheral control substrate 4140 that the palm or finger is touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control substrate 4140 is shown in FIG. Without displaying the demonstration screen to be the screen in the customer waiting state shown in (c) in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. A state (that is, a screen for a game in which the background image is rendered during a battle of a humanoid machine (robot) in space) is maintained. At this time, sound effects and music are also kept flowing continuously without being faded out.

  On the other hand, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or interrupts the game, the palm and fingers are separated from the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the player is not playing a game. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the control board 4110 transmits to the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle main body 506, and the main control board 4100 is palm on the rotary handle main body 506. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 transmits the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall, because the peripheral control board 4140 is notified that the finger or the finger is not touched. A recess 314 formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 In the portable terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. If the ball does not enter the mouth 2101 or the lower start mouth 2102 continuously and the holding balls are digested and become zero, it sets the permission to perform the demonstration of the screen in the customer waiting state, and the demonstration Set the transition to power saving mode after doing. As a result, first, a screen of a demonstration to be a screen in the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 65C is drawn in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900. At this time, sound effects and music are set to mute. Then, when the demonstration screen is advanced and drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, three times in this embodiment) in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900, the power saving mode is entered, and the game board liquid crystal Nothing is displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 (that is, the screen becomes a black screen). At this time, various lamps provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 2 and various lamps provided on the game board 4 are also turned off.

  When the demonstration screen is drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and is in the power saving mode, the player touches the rotating handle main body 506 with a palm or finger. When a game is played (started), the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (b) are displayed in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 (that is, the background image is in space) The screen is switched to a game screen that is an effect during a battle of a humanoid machine (robot). That is, based on the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102, the variation of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (a) from the screen of the demonstration shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the screen is switched to the screen where the display is started suddenly or nothing is displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the power saving mode (that is, the screen becomes black). It does not suddenly switch to the screen on which the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole is placed in the concave portion 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Even though the player has not left the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or has not interrupted the game, the game ball does not enter the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 continuously. Even when the holding balls are digested and become zero, from the screen for gaming shown with the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (b) stopped, the customer wait shown in FIG. 65 (c) Since it is configured not to switch to the demonstration screen that is the screen of the state, even though the game is in progress, a strike such as frustration or a sense of humiliation that the screen is switched to the demonstration screen And it is capable of suppressing the deterioration of the game will of the player by the scan.

[16-6. Image of absence notice displayed in display area of liquid crystal display device]
Next, an image of the absence notification displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIG. When a player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game, the player may leave the seat due to, for example, a rest break, a drink purchase, or the like. When the player leaves the seat, by taking out the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Communication with the control board 4140 can not be performed. In response to this, the peripheral control board 4140 starts measuring an elapsed time when communication with the portable terminal 470 can not be performed, that is, an elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314 d It is supposed to be. When the portable terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not seated in the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is not ready to start the game. It is configured to display on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 a screen of an absence notification for notifying that the absence is taking place.

  Specifically, in the portable terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57, the plate illustrated in FIG. 7 is the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole. When the portable terminal 470 is removed from the recess 314 d (lifted) from the state where it is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper tray upper panel 314 of the unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is It is determined that the player is seated on the front and is not ready to start a game, and as shown in FIG. At the center of the display area, control is performed so that the message "Away" is displayed in a large size as a notification of absence. Since the state of notifying and displaying the screen of the absence notification in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is maintained, it is possible to continuously notify that the user is away.

  It should be noted that the screen for notifying of leaving is that the player who left the seat returns to the pachinko gaming machine 1 again and places the portable terminal 470 in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 (set The state displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is maintained until the game. However, as described above, a clerk such as a clerk of a hall traveling around the hall places the clerk mobile terminal MST owned by himself in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300. The elapsed time since the player who left the seat takes out (lifts) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314 d is displayed in the display area of the attendant mobile terminal MST, and the elapsed time displayed on the screen is displayed for a predetermined time In the present embodiment, when 15 minutes has elapsed, the correspondence between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat is canceled, and the customer is notified of the absence notification. It will switch to a demonstration that will be a waiting screen. As a result, the correspondence between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat is canceled, whereby a clerk such as a clerk in the hall takes out the clerk's portable terminal MST from the recess 314 d ( When lifted up, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) can receive a portable terminal 470 'owned by another player. In other words, another player can sit on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and place the portable terminal 470 'in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start playing the game. There is. When a clerk such as a clerk in the hall takes out the clerk mobile terminal MST from the recess 314d (lifts it up), the screen of the notice of absence from seat is switched to a demonstration that becomes a screen waiting for customers. When the portable terminal is placed (set) in the recess 314 d and the game is not started, the power saving mode is entered after demonstration.

  Thus, when the player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game, for example, when leaving the seat due to, for example, a rest break or purchase of a drink, the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. The portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 can not communicate with each other by taking out (by lifting) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the dish upper panel 314. In response to this, the peripheral control board 4140 is configured to display a screen of a notification of absence for notifying that the user is away in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has already been started by watching the screen for leaving notification that is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 for other players than the player who has left the seat. Since it is possible to understand that the game is interrupted due to a restroom break, purchase of a drink, etc., it is mistakenly seated on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game interruption to restart the game Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from resuming a game while returning to the original seat even if the player leaves the seat.

[17. Image displayed in display area of mobile terminal]
Next, an image displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. First, an image of an error notification displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be described, and then, an image of setting of a break time displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be described, and displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 The image of the call of the attendant to be done will be described. FIG. 67 is a view showing an example of an image of error notification displayed in the display area of the portable terminal, and FIG. 68 is a view showing an exemplary image of setting of a break time displayed in the display area of the portable terminal FIG. 69 is a view showing an example of a call image of a clerk displayed in the display area of the portable terminal.

[17-1. Image of error notification displayed in display area of mobile terminal]
First, an image for error notification displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures and the like on an error LED display 860b provided on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The pachinko game is played while placing the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When an error occurs in the state of the machine 1, the content displayed on the error LED indicator 860b is also displayed as an error notification screen on the display area of the portable terminal 470, and a clerk of a hall, etc. Before the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 1, the contents displayed on the error LED display 860b can be known from the screen displayed on the display area of the portable terminal 470. It has become.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, in the display area of the portable terminal 470, in order to notify that “the ball is out” when the number “1” is displayed on the error LED display 860b. “Back to the top” of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the right side, and “<Error notification>” indicating the error notification screen is displayed on the upper left side as the message MS0, and below the message MS0 “Ball out” (NO. 1), which indicates the content of the error, is displayed as the message MS1. In this example, a message indicating "ball out" is displayed as the message MS1, and "NO. 1" which is the number "1" displayed on the error LED display 860b is displayed. . Below this message MS1, there is a "ball out" that tells the specific steps to correct the error. Open the body frame and check the blinking points A to C in the right figure. Is displayed as the message MS2. In this example, as a specific procedure for eliminating the error of "ball out", in the rear photo PIC of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is instructed to check the prize ball tank 720 at the position corresponding to the prize ball tank 720. In step A, the letter A is displayed in red in a circle (EP0), and the letter B is circled in a step B indicating that the tank rail 731 is to be checked at a position corresponding to the tank rail 731 Step C, which blinks in red in the closed state (EP1) and instructs to check the prize ball unit 700 at the position corresponding to the prize ball unit 700, is in a state where the letter C is circled (EP2) It blinks in red. In this way, the procedure A to procedure C checks the procedure A to the procedure A by repeating the procedure A to the procedure C repeatedly in the order of the procedure A, the procedure B, and the procedure C, returning to the procedure A, and so on. It is supposed to be informed.

  In addition, convey the method for canceling the error notification below the message MS2. [To cancel the error, please press the operation switch. Is displayed as the message MS3. In this example, in the rear photo PIC of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the character “operation switch” indicating the position of the operation switch 860a is displayed as the state (ER) of red balloon characters. As described above, when the operation switch 860a is notified of an error after the power is turned on, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the error can be canceled.

  Further, below the message MS3, on the lower left side of the display area of the portable terminal 470, a 7-segment image ED imitating the error LED display 860b is displayed. In this example, since the number “1” conveying “ball out” is displayed on the error LED display 860 b, the number “1” is displayed in red in the 7-segment image ED and the dots are also displayed in red.

  When an error occurs in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clerk or the like in the hall opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 1 according to the content displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. In addition to being able to know the content displayed on the error LED indicator 860b, even if the person is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, a procedure for eliminating the error handling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to know it without checking the manual. In addition, when the store clerk or the like in the hall opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 to actually eliminate the error, the portable terminal 470 is formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. While looking at the message MS2 displayed on the display area of the portable terminal 470 and the back photo PIC of the pachinko gaming machine 1 taken out from the recessed part 314d to be made, easily find out (specify) the inspection site of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be checked one by one along the procedure. Therefore, it can contribute to the early solution of the error which occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the store clerk or the like in the hall opens the main frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and operates the operation switch 860a, the error notified state can be canceled, but unless the error itself is eliminated, the error LED While the contents of the error continue to be displayed on the display 860b, the portable terminal 470 is taken out from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, and the contents displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 are also displayed. It does not change. When the clerk or the like in the hall eliminates the error and the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 recognizes the cancellation of the error, the payout control MPU 4120a displays the error LED indicator 860b. The graphic "-" is displayed to notify that "normal". When the store clerk or the like in the hall eliminates the error and returns the portable terminal 470 back to the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the display area of the portable terminal 470 is shown in FIG. After the characters “The error has been eliminated” is displayed large at the center of the display area of the portable terminal 470 from the notification screen of the error display, the game screen (in game before switching to the notification screen of the error display) Screen).

[17-2. Image of rest time setting displayed in display area of mobile terminal]
Next, the image of the setting of the break time displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. When a player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game, he / she leaves the seat to take a meal break (including a break for interrupting the game and refreshing it. The same applies hereinafter) There is a case. In such a case, the player calls a store clerk in the hall and informs the store clerk or the like in the hall that he or she leaves the seat. Hall clerks, etc. "Please return to the seat and call the hall clerks again by what time and minutes." Or "Return to the seat within a predetermined period (for example, within 45 minutes) from now on again in the hall Tell the player that "Please call a clerk, etc." A store clerk or the like in the hall contacts the manager of the hall with a wireless device to notify that the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1 is to be opened from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 1, and the game board shown in FIG. A plate called "during a break" is arranged on the front of the fourth game area 1100, and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again. In addition to the wireless device for contacting the hall manager, the clerk of the hall, etc., as well as the terminal for operating the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 I am carrying around and traveling in the hall. The game information display device DCNT displays information on the game on the data display unit DCNTa. As described above, the information regarding this game is, for example, the number of times the jackpot left, the number of times the jackpot has fluctuated, the number of continuations of the jackpot, and the time when the player left the seat (the game information display device DCNT Also has the function of measuring the time when the person left the seat. In other words, the data display section DCNTa displays the number of big hits, the number of fluctuations until a big hit, and the number of continuations of big hits, and also displays the time that the player has left their seat It is possible to do it. The information about these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall through the pachinko island facility.

  A clerk in the hall contacts the manager of the hall with a wireless device, informs that the door frame 5 is to be opened from the main body frame 3, and places a plate "during a break" on the front of the game area 1100 of the game board 4 Then, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again, the terminal is used to start an operation to start clocking the time when the player left the seat on the game information display device DCNT. In addition, the clerk or the like in the hall can use the terminal to perform an operation to display the time when the player left his seat on the data display portion DCNTa of the gaming information display device DCNT.

  In this embodiment, when a player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, a clerk in the hall is called when leaving the seat to take a meal break, as shown in FIG. A screen for setting a break time is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. That is, an application for setting a break time is installed in advance on the portable terminal 470. This application is started up by a command (a break time setting drawing command described later) from the peripheral control board 4140.

  Specifically, when a player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, when a clerk in the hall is called when leaving the seat to take a meal break, a clerk in the hall, etc. As described above, contact the manager of the hall with a wireless device to tell that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and open the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 to play the game area of the game board 4 A plate called "during a break" is arranged on the front of 1100 and the door frame 5 is closed to the body frame 3 again. By this action, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 shown in FIG. 27 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door open signal via the payout control board 4110. The main control board 4100 transmits the door open command shown in FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the logic of the main frame door open signal, and when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door The frame open switch 618 transmits the main frame door open signal to the main control board 4100 via the dispensing control board 4110, and the main control board 4100 is a door shown in FIG. 35 based on the logic of the main frame door open signal. A close command is sent to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 57, and this analysis When the door control command from the main control board 4100 is included in the command, the break time is set for the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. The backup of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c to display a break time setting drawing command for displaying the screen for setting. Management target work area 4150ca Ban It is set to send a command storage area for a mobile terminal (not shown) in (1FR). Then, the rest time set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in the command transmission / reception processing of the portable terminal monitoring processing in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The setting drawing command is transmitted to the portable terminal 470.

  The portable terminal 470 having received the break time setting drawing command activates an application for setting the break time. When this application is activated, the display area of the portable terminal 470, as shown in FIG. A scroll display unit SC10 for setting a break time is displayed on the lower left of the message MS10. When a store clerk or the like in the hall moves a finger in contact from the lower side to the upper side in the scroll display unit SC10, it appears as if the reel is rotating in a direction to increase the rest time by 5 minutes. On the other hand, if it is moved while contacting from the upper side to the lower side, the aspect is as if the reel is rotating in the direction to reduce the rest time by 5 minutes. The time of the reverse display at the center of the scroll display unit SC10 is the time set as the break time. When the setting screen of the break time is drawn in the display area of the portable terminal 470, the break time (45 minutes in this embodiment) set as the default (initial value) at the center of the scroll display unit SC10. Is highlighted as a default (initial value). From this, it is assumed that a clerk or the like in the hall sets a break time of 45 minutes which is a default (initial value).

  In the display area of the portable terminal 470, the OK button BT10 is displayed on the lower right of the message MS10 and on the upper right of the scroll display unit SC10, and the cancel button BT11 is displayed on the lower right of the scroll display unit SC10. . In addition, when a store clerk or the like in the hall taps the cancel button BT11 (when the cancel button BT11 is touched), the portable terminal 470 ends this application and before the setting screen of the break time is displayed from the setting screen of the break time It is supposed to switch back to the screen of.

  When a clerk or the like in the hall operates the scroll display unit SC10 to set a break time and taps the OK button BT10 (when the OK button BT10 is touched), display of the portable terminal 470 is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (b) In the area, set the 'rest time' on the upper side. The message MS11 is displayed, and the message MS12 "the remaining 45 minutes until the game resumption time" is displayed below the message MS11. In this state, when a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the content of the message M11 is switched to the message MS13 of "mission in progress". When a store clerk or the like in the hall taps the OK button BT10 (when the OK button BT10 is touched), a break time is set for taking a meal break, or taking a break for interrupting and refreshing the game. A break time setting completion command to be transmitted is sent to the peripheral control board 4140.

  When a clerk in the hall takes out (lifts) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 and delivers it to the player, the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 As a result, the portable terminal 470 starts to count the remaining time until the game restart time. On the other hand, as described above, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is a recess in the portable terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power on process shown in FIG. If the portable terminal 470 is not placed at 314 d, it is determined that the player is not ready to start playing by sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a screen waiting for customers is Permission to perform demonstrations and to set transition to the power saving mode after performing the demonstrations.

  In the portable terminal 470, the remaining time until the game resumption time is counted, and when the remaining is 3 minutes, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the display area of the portable terminal 470 The message MS13 is displayed, and the message MS12 "3 minutes remaining until the game restart time" is displayed below the message MS13, and the 3 minutes of the remaining time "3" blinks and the background color is displayed It becomes an aspect which changes from white to deep red. At this time, the portable terminal 470 continues to vibrate as being bully, and a warning sound of "boo, boo, boo" continues to be emitted.

  In such a state, when the portable terminal 470 is placed again in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, communication between the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored. Since the peripheral control board 4140 has already received the break time setting completion command, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the meal break has ended, and transmits a command to stop the vibration and the alarm sound to the portable terminal 470. Thereby, the vibration and the alarm sound of the portable terminal 470 are stopped. And although not shown in the figure, in the display area of the portable terminal 470, the background color is white and the “mission is completed! The red message “” is displayed in a large size, and the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. From the background color is white in the middle of it "Congratulations on completing the mission! The red message is displayed in a large size. Then, when a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the content displayed when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the display area of the portable terminal 470 and the display of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Each is displayed in the area.

  In addition, even if it is a time exceeding the remaining 3 minutes until the game resumption time (for example, 5 minutes until the game resumption time), the portable terminal 470 is formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 When the communication between the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored after being placed in the recessed portion 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 always transmits a command to stop the vibration and the alarm sound. Since the portable terminal 470 is not vibrating until the game resumption time is more than three minutes (for example, when the remaining five minutes until the game resumption time), the alarm sound does not sound, so the peripheral control board Even when a command from 4140 is received, the received command is discarded.

  Thus, when the player is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game, the clerk of the hall is called when leaving the seat to take a meal break, as shown in FIG. A break time setting screen is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and a store clerk or the like in the hall sets the break time. When the portable terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper tray upper panel 314 of the unit 300 and handed over to the player, the display area of the portable terminal 470 has several minutes remaining until the game resume time. By displaying whether it is or not, the mission for returning to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started again by the game resumption time. In other words, instead of being interrupted by the meal break, the time during which the player continues to enjoy playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 until taking the meal break is not interrupted by the meal break, and returns to the pachinko machine 1 again by the game resumption time in the meal break. Even if the player can not play a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to a meal break by giving a special mission for the player to the meal break, that is, the effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a meal break Even if it is not possible to enjoy, it is possible to let the player experience the action of returning by the player's own game reopening time in order to carry out the special effect of the mission during the meal break . As a result, the time during which the player continues to enjoy playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the player takes a meal break is not interrupted by the meal break, but the behavior of the player himself is pachinko gaming machine in the meal break Even if it deviates from the effect which the machine of 1 performs, the effect by one's own bodily sensation is continued.

  Further, since the break time can be set in the display area of the portable terminal 470, for example, the break time may be set to any of the main control board 4100, the payout control board 4110, and the peripheral control board 4140. There is no need to provide an operation button or an operation switch for setting, and there is no need to install a program for setting and measuring a break time.

17-3. Image of call of clerk displayed in display area of mobile terminal]
Next, an image of an attendant's call displayed in the display area of portable terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The player sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, and the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 enters the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. By the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11, the main control side main processing of the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 38 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the starting opening 2101 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the gaming ball to the lower starting opening 2102 becomes “big hit”, as shown in FIG. The number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2103 is a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds, and each round is large within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) When the game ball enters the prize slot 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), it digests the round, and whenever one game ball enters the big winning opening 2103, the predetermined number A big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is generated that the number (for example, 15 balls) of gaming balls is paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the gaming ball to the lower starting opening 2102 is shown in FIG. 34 from the main control board 4100. The periphery control unit 4150 of the periphery control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variation display of the decoration symbol 1950a at the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decoration symbol 1950b at the center, and the decoration symbol 1950c at the right side is started, and after a predetermined time has passed The game is stopped so that the player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and at this time, the machine shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the display unit 1180 It has become. When the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are translucent so that the background image can be viewed, and the decorative symbol 1950a is directed from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area. In the display area from the upper center to the lower center, the decorative symbol 1950 c is displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started and a predetermined time has elapsed, Become a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started and after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are If it is not stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern, it becomes "off".

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits the big hit opening command shown in FIG. 34 to the peripheral control board 4140 when it is a "big hit" and generates a big hit gaming state. The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 57, and this analysis When the command includes the big hit opening command from the main control board 4100, the big hit opening is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the big hit game effect is developed, as shown in FIG. A staff call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in a hole on the portable terminal 470 placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 , Peripheral control ROM 4150 b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150 Is set to send a command storage area for a mobile terminal (not shown) in the various control data copy area 4150ce extract and backup management target work area 4150ca of peripheral control RAM4150c shown in FIG. 15 from the Bank (1FR). Then, a staff call is set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) by the command transmission / reception processing of the portable terminal monitoring processing in step S1013 in peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The drawing command is transmitted to the portable terminal 470.

  The portable terminal 470 that has received the clerk call drawing command activates an application for calling a clerk such as a clerk of a hall. That is, an application for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall is installed in advance on the portable terminal 470. When this application is activated, the display area of the portable terminal 470 conveys a message indicating that it is a call screen of a clerk for calling a clerk such as a clerk in the hall on the upper side as shown in FIG. 69 (a) Is displayed as a message MS20, and a rectangular call button BT20 for calling a person in the center of the display area of the portable terminal 470 is displayed below the message MS20. In the call button BT20, a comment "call: long press" is drawn, and the call button BT20 is drawn in the same color as the background color (white in this embodiment) of the display area of the portable terminal 470. . When the player touches the call button BT20 with a finger, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the background color of the call button BT20 changes (in this embodiment, it changes from white to red) and the contents of the comment Changes from "call: long press" to "call: long press". When this state continues until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, display of message MS20 disappears from the display area of portable terminal 470 as shown in FIG. 69 (c), and portable terminal 470 The background color of the display area of is changed from white to red, and the message MS21 "ringing" is displayed large at the center of the display area of the portable terminal 470 in a blinking manner. It should be noted that if the state in which the call button BT20 is touched with a finger is not maintained until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the screen shown in FIG. It returns to the initial screen of the agent's call shown in.

  The portable terminal 470 transmits an agent call request command for conveying a request for calling an attendant such as a store clerk in a hall when the message MS21 of "in ringing" is displayed in a blinking manner. The peripheral control board 4140 also analyzes various commands transmitted from the portable terminal 470 in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. When the command includes an attendant call request command from the portable terminal 470, the output data for outputting an attendant call request signal to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 is the same as that of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in an output data storage area (not shown) for a game information display device in Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca. Then, it is set in a game information display device output data storage area (not shown) in the game information display device process of the portable terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the periphery control unit steady process of the periphery control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The staff calling request signal thus outputted is outputted to the game information display device DCNT.

  The gaming information display device DCNT, to which the clerk call request signal has been input, is controlled so that the call button DCNTb provided in advance for calling a store clerk or the like in the hall is operated, the data of the gaming information display device DCNT A plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) provided on both sides of the display unit DCNTa emit light in a calling light emission mode, and a character calling "calling" is scrolled on the data display unit DCNTa of the gaming information display device DCNT It is supposed to be in the state. When a store clerk or the like in the hall rushes and operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT, the light emission of the call emission mode by the plurality of lamps of the game information display device DCNT stops and the data display portion DCNTa of the data display device DCNT By stopping the scroll display of the characters "in calling" by the user, the agent call state is released.

  When the store clerk or the like in the hall operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT to release the attendant call state, the game information display device DCNT outputs an attendant call cancellation signal to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not various signals from the gaming information display device DCNT are inputted in the gaming information display device information acquisition processing of step S1109 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Based on this determination, clerk call release information is created as history information, and is set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in Bank (1 ms) of backup management target work area 4150 ca of peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. Do. Then, a staff member set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the command transmission / reception processing of the portable terminal monitoring processing in step S1013 in the peripheral control part steady processing in the peripheral control part power-on processing shown in FIG. Based on the call cancellation information, for example, it is determined whether or not a clerk call cancellation signal is inputted a predetermined number of times (four times in the present embodiment) continuously (every 1 ms) in the clerk call cancellation information. When the attendant call cancellation signal is input, the attendant call cancellation command is transmitted to the portable terminal 470 in order to notify the portable terminal 470 to that effect.

  The portable terminal 470 that has received the clerk call cancellation command returns from the display mode of FIG. 69 (c) to the normal background color (white in this embodiment), and the character of "big hit" is displayed at the center of the display area. It is displayed large.

  As described above, the player sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, and the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 is the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower starting shown in FIG. The main control side main processing of the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 38 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 after entering the port 2102 and the main control timer interrupt shown in FIG. When the first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 by the processing etc., or the second special drawing result drawn by the reception of the gaming ball to the lower starting opening 2102 becomes “big hit”, Since a plurality of gaming balls are paid out one after another as a winning ball from the winning ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 is full, the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Gaming balls are paid out one after another to the lower tray 302. Since a so-called "dollar box" is disposed below the lower tray 302, the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be dropped into the dollar box. Because there is a limit to the game balls that can be stored in this dollar box, the game information display device arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1 to exchange it with another empty dollar box before the dollar box is full. It is necessary to reach the call button of the DCNT, reach the call button DCNTb, and call the store clerk or the like in the hall. However, it is difficult for the player to separate the right hand from the front of the rotary handle main body 506 because the player can not obtain a winning ball unless the player turns the front of the rotary handle main body 506 shown in FIG. Can not but take an unreasonable posture of extending the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the case of an elderly player, the left hand did not reach it, and it was necessary to stand up a little from the seat and operate in a relaxed state, which was a burden on the waist.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit", the opening of the big hit is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the big hit game effect is developed, and the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 A staff call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in a hall is transmitted to the portable terminal 470 with respect to the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side. An application for calling a store clerk or the like in a hall is to be started. As a result, the player displays the call button displayed on the display area of the portable terminal 470 without directly reaching the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 By keeping the state in which the BT 20 is touched with a finger until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, a store clerk or the like in the hall similarly to when the call button DCNTb of the gaming information display device DCNT is directly operated. It is possible to call an attendant.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the call button BT20 is touched with a finger is not maintained until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the screen shown in FIG. It returns to the initial screen of the call of the attendant shown in 68 (a). In this case, assuming that the player's finger accidentally touches the call button BT20, the user waits until the player's intention of a predetermined period can be confirmed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the hit switch launch device 650 of FIG. 5, the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11, the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. Is equipped. When the rotary handle main body 506 of the handle device 500 of FIG. 7 is operated, the ball hitting device 650 plays toward the game area 1100 defined in the game board 4 of FIG. 8 with a firing strength corresponding to the operation amount. The ball can be fired by the firing solenoid 654 of FIG. 12 which is an electric drive source. The main control board 4100 detects that the game ball has entered the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 in FIG. 8 which is the starting area provided on the game board 4 and the upper starting opening switch 3022 and lower in FIG. The progress of the game can be controlled based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109. The peripheral control board 4140 can control the progression of effects by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 8 based on various commands which are control commands shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 from the main control board 4100. is there. The touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 can detect whether or not the front handle 506 of the handle of the handle device 500 is operated. Specifically, the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 can detect whether a palm or a finger is touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the game is started by operating the rotary handle front 506 based at least on the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500. Then, the humanoid machines (robots) of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be put on the catapult to proceed with preparation for starting the game. ing. Specifically, when the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 is input to the power supply substrate 851 of FIG. 22, the payout control substrate 4110 of FIG. It is inputted to the payout control input circuit 4120 b in the above and is inputted to the payout control MPU 4120 a. The payout control MPU 4120a determines that the front of the rotary handle main body 506 of the handle device 500 is operated based on the logic of the payout contact signal, that is, if the palm or finger is touched on the front of the rotary handle main body 506 When it has been set, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) in order to convey that “the steering wheel is being operated” in the frame status 2 command in FIG. 36, and the payout control portion in the processing at power-on of FIG. It is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in the command transmission process of step S566 in the process. The main control board 4100 receiving this frame status 2 command reshapes it into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) by adding “7 * H” which is additional information to the received frame status 2 command. Then, the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 39 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives the frame status 2 command shaped into 2 bytes (16 bits) is the peripheral control unit steady state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on shown in FIG. In the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the process, when the frame state 2 command includes the indication that "the handle is being operated", it is determined that the front handle 506 of the handle of the handle device 500 is operated. Based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. Because of this, schedule data for effecting at the game start time is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae are updated, as shown in FIG. Human type machine shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 63 (a) to (d) by peripheral control unit steady processing (game start effect progression control means) of step S1009 to step S1038 in peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown. An effect at the start of the game is promoted in which the robot is put on the catapult and advances preparation for the start.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 proceeds in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on detection signals from the upper start opening switch 3022 and the lower start opening switch 2109 in FIG. Judgment of success that tells whether or not a big hit gaming state that will be advantageous for the player occurs from the effect at the start of the game when the humanoid machines (robots) of (a) to (d) are loaded on the catapult and advance preparation for launch. Figure 64 (c), the humanoid machine (robot) of (d) as a game effect for deriving and displaying the result is ejected from the catapult toward space and the first start winning combination limited effect and Figure 65 ( a), (b) can be switched to the effect of performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, and these effects can be advanced It has become. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball received to the upper starting opening 2101 which is the starting area provided on the game board 4, the main control board 4100 is shown in FIG. Among the commands relating to the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command instructing the special figure tuning effect start, the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. As shown in FIG. 34 based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 which detects the game ball transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or received to the lower starting opening 2102 which is the starting area provided on the game board 4. Of the commands relating to the special figure 2 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command instructing the special figure tuning effect start, the main control side timer of FIG. 39 Or transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the interrupt processing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is the peripheral control unit steady state processing of the peripheral control unit power on processing shown in FIG. In the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the process, it is determined to start a game effect for deriving and displaying a winning determination result that tells whether or not a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. Based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. Therefore, schedule data for performing a game effect is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae are updated, as shown in FIG. The humanoid machine (robot shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and (d) by peripheral control unit steady processing (game effect progression control means) of step S1009 to step S1038 in peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown. First stage start-up winning combination production is promoted that is ejected from the catapult toward space and then started, and then, as a background image, the production during the battle of a humanoid machine (robot) in the space is shown in FIG. , (B), as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is advanced. To have.

  64 (c) and (d) as the game effect switched from the game start effect of FIGS. 63 (a) to (d) The first start winning limited effect of FIG. It is supposed to be Specifically, in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, a humanoid machine (robot) is put on the catapult to start preparation for the start of the game. It switches to the first start winning limited production that it is ejected toward the space and started, and then the figure in FIG. 65 (a) and (b) with the effect during the battle of the humanoid machine (robot) in the space as the background image. The effect is developed by advancing the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c.

  As described above, when it is determined that the front handle 506 of the handle of the handle device 500 is being operated based on the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500, as shown in FIG. The display at the start of the game is started, in which the humanoid machines (robots) (a) to (d) are placed on the catapult and advance preparation for the start. As a result, the player is seated on the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operates the front handle 506 of the handle device 500 to drive the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 defined in the gaming board 4 as an electric drive source. Even though the game is started by launching the game by using the firing solenoid 654, the game ball continues to not enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102, which are start areas provided on the game board 4. When the player operates the front handle 506 of the handle device 500 to start the game, the effects at the start of the game shown in FIGS. 63 (a)-(d) by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 automatically advance. Because the game ball does not enter the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 which is the starting area at the time of game start, the state where the effect does not advance at all It has to be able to avoid. Then, the player operates the front handle 506 of the handle device 500 to cause the game ball to be fired by the firing solenoid 654 which is an electric drive source, and enters the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 as the start area. If it is set, the humanoid machines (robots) of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) advancing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are put on the catapult to advance preparation for starting, which is advantageous for the player. As a game effect to derive and display the win determination result to tell whether the big hit gaming state will be generated or not, the first start winning limited that a humanoid machine (robot) is ejected from the catapult towards space to start Directed by a humanoid machine (robot) in outer space, then, as a background image, an effect during a battle of a humanoid machine (robot) So that the switch to the variable display. The first start winning limited production as a game effect that switches from the game start effect is an effect that has a story that is continuous with the game start effect, that is, a game start where a humanoid machine (robot) is put on the catapult and advances preparation for start The first start-up winning combination limited production that a humanoid machine (robot) is ejected from a catapult toward space from a stage effect and then starts, and then a representation as a background image of a man-made machine (robot) in battle in space. The decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are developed as effects that are variably displayed, and this does not give a sense of discomfort to the player when switching from the effect at the start of the game to the first start winning effect as the effect for the game. The continuation of the effect at the time of game start by the change of the effect is the first time start winning limited effect as a game effect Continuously and is adapted to be deployed. For this reason, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a sense of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur in the result of the win determination due to the switching of the effect. In this manner, the player determines whether or not a big hit gaming state occurs which is advantageous for the player after starting the game after starting the game by operating the front handle 506 of the handle device 500. It can contribute to improving the game intention of the player in stages in each effect until the derivation display of the is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game from the start of the game to the progress of the game effect.

[18. Another example]
The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be practiced in various forms within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the effect at the start of the game is advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player rotates the front handle of the rotary handle 506 clockwise to hit the ball shown in FIG. Even if the game ball is fired from the launch device 650 and the game is started, the gate formed on the center character 2300 shown in FIG. 8 does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (start winning). When the game ball passes through the portion 2350, it is detected by the gate switch 2352 provided in the gate portion 2350, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352, the start-up winning inspirational effect is advanced following the effect at the game start However, in addition to the gate unit 2350, based on the game ball entering the general winning opening 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. It may be allowed to proceed to start winning inspiring performance to have. In this case, since the gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 are detected by the general winning opening switch 3020, the main control board 4100 indicates that based on the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020. Is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 having received the general winning a prize command performs the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power on processing shown in FIG. It is determined that the start-up winning inspirational effect is to be started while proceeding with the game start effect. Based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. Because of this, schedule data for performing the start winning game rendition is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae are updated, as shown in FIG. In the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown, the start winning attraction performance of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) is advanced.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, a screen for calling a clerk such as a clerk of a hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 when a predetermined condition of “big hit” and generating a big hit gaming state is satisfied. To call a clerk such as a clerk of the hall in the display area of the portable terminal 470, given that the lower plate 302 is full of gaming balls and that a predetermined condition is met. A screen may be displayed. In this way, the gaming ball is not stored in the box (so-called "dollar box") disposed below the lower tray 302 (for example, the player starts the gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Even in the first jackpot state), since it is not necessary to call a person in charge of a store clerk or the like in the hall, unnecessary calls can be avoided. Then, when the box becomes full by game balls paid out one after another from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 is operated through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354. The game balls are stored in the lower plate 302 without stopping the downward pulling. Eventually, the lower tray 302 is also filled up with gaming balls sequentially paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and therefore, it is assumed that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the lower tray 302 is filled up with gaming balls. The display area of the terminal 470 displays a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall. Specifically, when the lower plate 302 is filled with gaming balls (specifically, when the above-described storage space is filled with the stored gaming balls), it is detected by the full tank switch 550 of FIG. A detection signal is input to the payout control substrate 4110 of FIG. 12 via the handle relay terminal 192 of FIG. 12 and the power supply substrate 851 of FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 of FIG. 12 transmits the frame state 1 command of FIG. 36 to the main control substrate 4100 of FIG. 11 based on the logic of the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. . The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11 shapes the received frame state 1 command and transmits a frame state 1 command divided into the state display of FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the frame state 1 command from the main control board 4100, and when the received frame state 1 command includes information indicating that the frame is full, the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is A staff call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in a hall is transmitted to the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 when a predetermined condition of “big hit” and generating a big hit gaming state is satisfied. However, the jackpot game has been started, and a predetermined condition of starting a predetermined round of 15 rounds (for example, 6 rounds are digested and 7 rounds are started) is established. At the same time, a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in a hall may be displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. In this way, when the jackpot gaming state occurs and the first round is started, the number of gaming balls stored in the box disposed below the lower tray 302 may still be small. When the predetermined condition that the predetermined round is started is satisfied, the display area of the portable terminal 470 is switched from the screen of the big hit game effect display to a screen for calling a clerk of a hall or the like and displayed. Thus, the player can be informed that the box should be replaced before the box is full.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in the hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470, and the player operates the call button BT20 provided on this screen to display the hall. When a request for calling a clerk or the like is output from the portable terminal 470 to the gaming information display device DCNT as a clerk call request signal via the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming information display device DCNT for calling the clerk or the like in the hall When the call button DCNTb is controlled to be operated and the store clerk or the like in the hall operates the call button DCNTb of the gaming information display device DCNT to release the clerk calling state, the gaming information display device DCNT to the peripheral control board 4140 Receive an agent call release command from peripheral control board 4140 by outputting an agent call release signal The portable terminal 470 returns to the normal background color (white in this embodiment) from the display mode of FIG. 69 (c), and the character of "big hit" is displayed large at the center of the display area. Even though a screen for calling a clerk such as a store clerk in a hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470, the portable terminal 470 calls the clerk from the peripheral control board 4140 even after a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses. When the cancellation command can not be received, the clerk or the like of the hall has not arrived at the pachinko gaming machine 1 yet with respect to the portable terminal management device that manages the portable terminal 470 installed in the hall management room or reception (that is, the game Information that does not correspond to the person's call request) may be transmitted wirelessly. In this way, a manager of the hall management room or a counter clerk at the reception of the hall contacts the clerk of the hall where the hall is visited with a wireless device so that he can immediately go to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be instructed.

  Then, in the embodiment described above, the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hole is placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Although it has been started, it may be a portable terminal owned by the player itself, not the portable terminal 470 managed in the hall. In this case, the same application as the portable terminal 470 managed by the hall may be installed on the portable terminal owned by the player by a clerk of the hall or the like, or the homepage of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is accessed to access the hall. The same application as the mobile terminal 470 to be managed may be downloaded and installed.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, image data for the portable terminal 470 is communicated from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 4160a with built-in sound source The image data from the channel CH2 is rendered in the display area of the portable terminal 470 by outputting to the portable terminal 470 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the unit 4162. However, in the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the portable terminal Instead of generating the image data drawn in the display area 470, the image data drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 may be installed in the mobile terminal in a state of being incorporated in the application in advance. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a command command to the portable terminal via the communication control circuit 4162a, and the portable terminal draws effects in the display area of the portable terminal according to the received command command. It will progress.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, even if the portable terminal 470 is brought out of the hall, the current position can be traced, but a pachinko gaming machine installed in another hall using the portable terminal 470 brought out Even if placed, communication may be rejected by the pachinko gaming machine, and may not be used at all in other holes.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko gaming machines, such as slot machines or the like The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine (one for playing a slot game using a game ball) in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... pachinko game machine (game machine), 2 ... outer frame, 3 ... main body frame, 4 ... game board, 5 ... door frame, 192 ... handle relay terminal board, 300 ... dish unit, 314 d ... recessed part, 460 ... portable terminal Charging device 460, 470: portable terminal, 500: handle device, 506: front of rotary handle (launching handle), 512: potentiometer, 516: touch switch (detection means), 519: gear mechanism, 470: portable terminal, 650: ... Ball hitting device (ball hitting device), 654 ... Small launch solenoid (electrical drive source), 740 ... Award ball device, 784 ... External terminal board, 851 ... Power supply board, 851 a ... Fuse, 852 ... Power switch, 855 ... Power supply control unit, 855a ... synchronous rectification circuit, 855b ... power factor improvement circuit, 855c ... smoothing circuit, 855d ... power supply creation circuit, 855e ... power supply destruction Road 857 ... firing control unit 857a ... firing control circuit, 857b ... electrolytic capacitor, 857c ... waste hitting prevention circuit, 860a ... operation switch, 860b ... error LED indicator, 1100 ... game area, 1900 ... game board side liquid crystal display Device, 2109 ... lower starting opening switch (starting area entry detection means), 3022 ... upper starting opening switch (starting area entry detection means), 3100 ... upper unit, 3150 ... humanoid machine head unit, 3400 ... character unit , 3500: gear decorative body unit, 4100: main control board (game control means), 4100a: main control MPU, 4100e: blackout monitoring circuit, 4110: payout control board, 4120: payout control unit, 4120a: payout control MPU, 4140 ... Peripheral control board (effect control means), 4150 ... Peripheral control unit, 416 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4165 ... RTC control unit, 4170 ... Lamp drive board, 4180 ... Motor drive board, BT 20 ... Call button, DCNT ... Game information display device, DCNTa ... Data display unit, DCNTb ... Call button, DCNTc ... Manual operation button.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that performs variable display,
Operation means operable by the player to fire the game ball;
Display means capable of displaying an effect;
Effect executing means for executing the effect;
Movable means movable between the standby position and the emergence position;
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable means can be moved to the appearance position, and the display means can be made to perform standby effect according to the movement of the movable means to the appearance position And
When the player touches the operation means with a palm or finger to start playing a game in a situation where the standby effect is being executed, the movable means appears at a position where the variable display is not performed. It is possible to move from the standby position to the standby position and switch to an effect display different from the standby effect displayed on the display means, and while the player is touching the operation means with a palm or a finger, A game machine characterized by continuing to execute an effect display different from the standby effect without executing the standby effect, in a state where the variable display is not performed .